*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
75d80cc6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-01-16
2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1 7
0cb146bf 8
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
40"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
41description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 42
0cb146bf 43
1fa28578
GM
44* Changes in Emacs 21.1
45
75d80cc6
DL
46** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
47behaviour of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. [This change was made
48in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
49
cf523f0e
GM
50** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
51let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
52
a23e6d3c 53** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
fc46ca23
GM
54current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
55beginning and end of the buffer.
56
8416e94a
DL
57** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
58symbol, not double-quoted.
59
2a64f8c2 60** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
61version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
62rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
63lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 64
22adbe54
DL
65+++
66** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
67system for keyboard input.
68
eb1b0c74
GM
69+++
70** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
71to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
72
7495f7ca
EZ
73+++
74** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
75as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
76with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
77example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
78middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
79
1636ca09 80+++
a01cfb77
GM
81** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
82changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
83buffer by default.
84
c607d53d 85** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 86trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
87this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
88
4104194e
GM
89** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
90be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
91
c6f01e00
MB
92** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
93To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
94`auto-compression-mode' command.
95
4c724b32
DL
96** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
97`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
98
b856f39c 99+++
068127d6
GM
100** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
101operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
102
fd06c7da
MB
103** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
104(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
105remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
106may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
107
8ac08dea 108+++
62c273d7
DL
109** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
110is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
111
112+++
113** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
114mode `iswitchb-mode'.
115
8ac08dea 116+++
f393cf90
DL
117** Gnus changes.
118
119The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
120four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
121internationalization and mail-fetching.
122
123*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
124many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
125
126If you used procmail like in
127
128(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
129(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
130(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
131(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
132
327652be 133this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
134
135(setq mail-sources
136 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
137 :suffix ".in")))
138
139More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
140Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
141
142*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
143Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
144Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
145longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
146
657706fa
DL
147The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
148use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
149installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 150
60dd7e0e 151*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
152parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
153are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
154now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
155
156*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
157called to position point.
158
159*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
160summary buffers and NOV files.
161
162*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
163of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
164
165*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
166subtly different manner.
167
168*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
169and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
170ever-changing layouts.
171
172*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
173
72190b84 174*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
175
176** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1778859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
178more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
179empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
180window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
181on.
182
ba9eeda1
GM
183** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
184set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
185file that is already visited under a different name.
186
42ac0ae5
GM
187** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
188nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
189
190** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
191recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
192signaled.
193
ba9eeda1 194** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
195support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
196use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
197buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
198M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
199new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
200
b941a14b 201+++
ba9eeda1 202** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 203and displays information about that.
b941a14b 204
ba9eeda1 205** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
206file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
207
5e56e175
GM
208** Polish, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
209have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `de-refcard.tex' and
210`fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
d7b38c05 211
657706fa
DL
212** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
213
d7b38c05 214** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
5e56e175
GM
215`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
216`fr-drdref.tex'.
d7b38c05 217
25ad1371
GM
218** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
219expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
220
221This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
222determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
223mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
224interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
225regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
226associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
227
b856f39c 228+++
f0298744
DL
229** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
230displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
231menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
232menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
233
9a8d84ca
DL
234** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
235a version-dependent component.
236
89d57763 237** The new user-option `delete-key-deletes-forward' can be set to
5f368d29
GM
238let the Delete function key delete forward instead of backward.
239
240On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
241according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
242key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
243option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
244delete backward, and Delete can be used used to delete forward
245
246If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
247a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
248Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
249`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
250the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting if you don't
251have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
252
253Programmatically, you can call function
254delete-key-deletes-forward-mode to toggle the behavior of the Delete
255key.
d76c03ea 256
3b4fa1b2
DL
257** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
258using that menu.
259
40e857ea 260** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 261suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 262
beb2eb00 263+++
c08398de
DL
264** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
265buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
266contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
267by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
268insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
269the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
270Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
271
db7a3ede 272+++
3d6cd763
GM
273** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
274coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
275escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
276such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
277recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 278always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 279read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
280(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
281RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 282
0b8a3a6d
DL
283** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
284environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
285
424d8b44 286+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
287** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
288point in a pop-up window.
289
6d35b49f 290+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
291** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
292displays all characters in that character set.
293
294** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
295coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
296
a4067978 297+++
5cb6a58e 298** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 299on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
300defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
301commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 302
424d8b44 303+++
a1b8d58b
GM
304** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
305
6e417ca5
DL
306** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
307been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
308
424d8b44 309+++
5898e075
DL
310** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
311`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
312indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
313indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
314
424d8b44 315+++
abfcc168
GM
316** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
317sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 318(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
319You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
320
424d8b44 321+++
cc181e95
GM
322** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
323on the display using several methods
324
424d8b44 325+++
cc181e95
GM
326- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
327a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
328be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
329
424d8b44 330+++
cc181e95 331- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 332equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 333
da4496b6 334- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
335
336- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
337the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
338
424d8b44 339+++
3b4fa1b2 340** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 341an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 342command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 343does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 344
424d8b44 345+++
176256a1 346** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
347`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
348typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 349
dd0add8e
DL
350** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
351characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
352
bf3ba9ac 353+++
699238d9
GM
354** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
355compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
356this behavior.
357
358The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
359compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
360Emacs dump core.
361
424d8b44 362+++
699238d9 363** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 364
7233c5bd
GM
365*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
366whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
367is useful for debugging X problems.
368
369Example:
370
699238d9 371 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 372
100b3cbb
GM
373*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
374visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
375the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
376and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
377visual class names are
378
379 TrueColor
380 PseudoColor
381 DirectColor
382 StaticColor
383 GrayScale
384 StaticGray
385
386Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
387`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
388meaning.
389
390The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
391supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
392`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
393visual.
394
395Example:
396
699238d9 397 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
398
399*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
400specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
401default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
402resource values are `true' or `on'.
403
404Example:
405
699238d9 406 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 407
0d0c76b8
EZ
408** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
409more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
410now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
411
e921a911 412+++
42088c12 413** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 414display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
415shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
416be customized.
c60ea02e 417
424d8b44 418+++
31047e0d
DL
419** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
420
424d8b44 421+++
b02786f9
GM
422** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
423all frames except the selected one.
424
3261c1d8
DL
425** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
426to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
427
ffe36136 428** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
429the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
430MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
431displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
432
0292b49f 433+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
434** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
435MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 436
559cee90
DL
437** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
438read mail from the menu etc.
439
480b5773 440+++
271b4185
GM
441** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
442a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
443
0daee095
GM
444** Changes in Texinfo mode.
445
a5e350c9 446*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
447macros
448
449 Key binding Macro
450 -------------------------
451 C-c C-c C-s @strong
452 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 453 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 454 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 455 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
456 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
457 M-RET @item
458
459*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 460
559cee90
DL
461** Changes in Outline mode.
462
463There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
464`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
465the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
466
327652be 467** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 468
c0a8c108
EZ
469+++
470*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
471with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
472are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
473Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
474buffers to kill, as before.
475
476Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 477i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
478this way.
479
956777b3
GM
480** Changes to Show Paren mode.
481
482*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
483The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
484use. Default is 1000.
485
f6989277 486+++
404fa7d6
DL
487** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
488groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
489
424d8b44
DL
490+++
491** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
492M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
493M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
494buffers.
8964fec7 495
424d8b44 496+++
39783d73
WP
497** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
498under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
499.emacs file.
500
501The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
502determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
503
d35fce81
GM
504** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
505abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
506`directory-abbrev-alist'.
507
a933dad1
DL
508** Faces and frame parameters.
509
510There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
511Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
512`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
513`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
514sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
515for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
516parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
517
518Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
519`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 520`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
521`default' face and vice versa.
522
d80061fa 523+++
f77a4a8a
GM
524** New face `menu'.
525
526The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
527Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
528attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
529
424d8b44 530+++
a933dad1
DL
531** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
532
533The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
534colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
535correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
536the screen gamma of a frame's display.
537
538PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
539in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
540color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
541
542The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
543`ScreenGamma'.
544
545** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
546
547The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
548Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
549oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
550of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
551the text.
552
553** Emacs has a new face implementation.
554
555The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
556font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
557height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
558These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
559specify a font.
560
561Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
562These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
563under Lisp changes, below.
564
7f90b826 565** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
a933dad1 566
424d8b44
DL
567+++
568** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
569of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
570otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
571
572** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
573truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
574foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
575customizing face `fringe'.
576
8d0f00fd
MB
577** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
578You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
ccd87890
EZ
579In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
580appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
581occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
582the window to be partially obscured.)
8d0f00fd
MB
583
584The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
585versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
586and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
587
588** LessTif support.
589
424d8b44
DL
590Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
591You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
592
593** Toolkit scroll bars.
594
595Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
596LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
597configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
598bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
599bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
600Emacs.
601
602When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
603Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
604Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
605Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
606define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
607`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
608
609Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
610a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
611directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
612different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
613system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
614add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
615
616The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
617`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
618This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
619image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
620Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
621
622** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
623
624When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
625widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
626Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
627
424d8b44 628+++
a933dad1
DL
629** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
630
631When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
632whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
633defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
634highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
635displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
636whitespace.
637
6e612d4d 638+++
a933dad1
DL
639** Busy-cursor.
640
641Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
642display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
643
424d8b44 644+++
a933dad1
DL
645** Blinking cursor
646
647M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
648terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
649and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
650the group `cursor'.
651
8ac08dea 652+++
a933dad1
DL
653** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
654
655This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
656generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
657See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
658details.
659
660Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
661have to do anything to activate it.
662
663** Tabs and variable-width text.
664
665Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
666defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
667independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
668Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
669
670** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
671
424d8b44 672+++
a933dad1
DL
673*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
674
675 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
676
79dd1637
RS
677The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
678LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 679
79dd1637
RS
680*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
681LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 682
34d90e29 683+++
a933dad1
DL
684** Hscrolling in C code.
685
cc181e95
GM
686Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
687`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
688customized.
a933dad1 689
03ff8aab
GM
690If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
691scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
692for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
693the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
694to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
695
8ac08dea 696+++
a933dad1
DL
697** Tool bar support.
698
699Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
700of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
701changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
b97cd2cc
DL
702displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
703if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
704icons will be used.
705
706To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
707for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
708also be useful manually to touch up some of the PBM icons.
a933dad1 709
424d8b44 710+++
a933dad1
DL
711** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
712
713Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
714mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
715line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
716about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
717in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
718
719Currently, the following actions have been defined:
720
721- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
722buffers.
723
724- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
725M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
726
727- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
728
424d8b44
DL
729- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
730`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1 731
3b6936cc 732- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
a933dad1
DL
733
734** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
735
736When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 737from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
738non-nil.
739
740** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
741
742Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
743Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
744the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
745italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
746Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
747attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
748on terminals.
a933dad1 749
54a9404d
EZ
750The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
751supported on character terminals.
752
a933dad1
DL
753** Sound support
754
2f516940 755Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 756driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 757supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 758
424d8b44 759+++
a933dad1
DL
760** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
761the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
762forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
763value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
764users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
765even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
766
767The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
768
0e18b431 769+++
a933dad1
DL
770** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
771
772As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
773drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
774`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
775
fdd8bb68 776+++
a933dad1
DL
777** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
778bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
779
780This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
781`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
782variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
783
c5d00c64 784+++
a933dad1
DL
785** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
786
787When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 788value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 789number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 790fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
791
792When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
793value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
794number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 795fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
796
797** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
798notably at the end of lines.
799
800All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
801spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
802
424d8b44 803+++
eee54b0e
DL
804There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
805
a933dad1
DL
806** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
807query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
808after each match to get the replacement text.
809
00782214 810+++
d5483ab1
GM
811** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
812you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 813
424d8b44 814** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
815you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
816lisp-complete-symbol.
817
7af69644 818+++
a933dad1
DL
819** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
820
163ea954 821If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
822longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
823is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
824minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
825
826- User option: max-mini-window-height
827
828Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
829fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 830specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
831
832Default is 0.25.
833
a299a6f0
GM
834- User option: resize-mini-windows
835
836How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 837resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
838grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
839again.
840
841Default is `grow-only'.
842
2f72fd2f
GM
843** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
844
0d43b60d
GM
845** Changes to hideshow.el
846
847Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
848selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
849conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
850
851*** Generalized block selection and traversal
852
853A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
854(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
855which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
856`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
857point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
858(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
859
860If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
861i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
862backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
863the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
864
865*** Isearch support for updating mode line
866
867During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
868blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
869line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
870portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
871is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
872
873To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
874something like this in your .emacs.
875
876 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
877 (lambda ()
878 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
879
327652be
TTN
880*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
881
882Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
883header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
884`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
885moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
886block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
887behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
888useful.
889
890You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
891function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
892of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
893code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
894appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
895
896(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
897 (hs-hide-level 1)
898 (forward-sexp 1))
899(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
900
901The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
902emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
903only for code blocks.
904
905*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
906
907Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
908parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
909display for implementation.
910
911*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
912
913The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
914LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
915which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
916new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
917
918 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
919 hs-show-block C-c C-s
920 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
921 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
922 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
923 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
924 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
925
926These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
927
559cee90
DL
928** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
929
424d8b44 930+++
1b24b888
GM
931*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
932an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
933log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
934
424d8b44 935+++
1b24b888
GM
936**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
937current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
938
939+++
1b24b888
GM
940*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
941in a log file.
eb2aac9d 942
502004be 943+++
1b24b888
GM
944*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
945entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 946
502004be 947+++
1b24b888 948*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
949version number is performed based on regular expressions from
950`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
951Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 952
2c63c979 953*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 954
79c78e77
GM
955** Changes to cmuscheme
956
957*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
958`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
959
3476b54a
GM
960** Changes in Font Lock
961
962*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 963font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 964
2be6ecc6
GM
965*** Multiline patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
966set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
2c63c979 967
a5e350c9
SM
968*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
969the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 970
601e0081
SM
971*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
972Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
973
b3b98592
GM
974** Comint (subshell) changes
975
988cded7
MB
976These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
977include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
978
979*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
980to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
981parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
982user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
983this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
984respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
985feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
986`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
987
988*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
989and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
990
988cded7 991*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
992buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
993buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
994
995The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
996M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
997the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
998
988cded7
MB
999*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
1000and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
1001see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 1002
988cded7 1003*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
1004saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
1005argument, it appends to the file.
1006
988cded7 1007*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
1008(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
1009compatibility.
1010
0e40b809
EL
1011*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
1012ring (history).
d648cc45 1013
fe5d5d8c 1014*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
1015identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1016strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1017
e26cec67
GM
1018** Changes to Rmail mode
1019
b97cd2cc 1020*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
c0510d27
GM
1021set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
1022receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1023recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1024`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1025as correspondent.
1026
1027Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1028mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1029regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1030
3b55acc9
GM
1031*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1032to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1033Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1034with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1035for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1036
6a1950ec
GM
1037*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1038like `j'.
1039
5bb6f079
RS
1040*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1041specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1042digest message.
e26cec67 1043
993d8b7d
DL
1044*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1045in which folder to put messages automatically.
1046
4ddb57b2
EZ
1047*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1048with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1049due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1050
400a1ed0
GM
1051** Changes to TeX mode
1052
a5e350c9 1053*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1054`latex-mode'.
1055
a5e350c9
SM
1056*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1057
1058*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1059
1060*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1061
a933dad1
DL
1062** Changes to RefTeX mode
1063
1064*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1065 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1066 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1067 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1068 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1069 can be edited from that buffer.
1070
1071*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1072 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1073 `A' to use all marked entries).
1074
1075*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1076 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1077
1078*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1079 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1080 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1081 been cited.
1082
38de9631
GM
1083** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1084The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1085semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1086in column 1 are always made leaves.
1087
a933dad1
DL
1088** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1089has the following new features:
1090
1091*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1092may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1093to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1094time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1095
1096*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1097feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1098file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1099compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1100pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1101defaults to 1.
1102
5d94f558 1103** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1104file names.
1105
424d8b44 1106+++
a933dad1
DL
1107** Tooltips.
1108
1109Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1110mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1111turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1112
1113Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1114variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1115the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1116tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1117
424d8b44 1118+++
a933dad1
DL
1119** Customize changes
1120
1121*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1122`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1123cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1124
1125*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1126Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1127default).
1128
0ae51efb
GM
1129*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1130between custom options. Example:
1131
1132 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1133 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1134 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1135 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1136 :group 'mule
1137 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1138 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1139
1140This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1141current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1142first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1143
a933dad1
DL
1144** New features in evaluation commands
1145
5e03eb84 1146*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1147modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1148print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1149customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1150eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1151
5e03eb84
GM
1152*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1153code when called with a prefix argument.
1154
ead53494
GM
1155** Ispell changes
1156
37d8a691 1157+++
bbe15990
EZ
1158*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1159transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1160spell-checks the current buffer.
1161
37d8a691 1162+++
385ff9e3
GM
1163*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1164added.
1165
1166*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1167correction is made and re-checked.
1168
74ec6045 1169*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1170
1171*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1172cases.
1173
1174*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1175on syntax errors.
1176
1177*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1178end of the buffer.
1179
a933dad1
DL
1180** Dired changes
1181
1182*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1183command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1184is, delete only empty directories.
1185
1186*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1187command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1188copy directories recursively.
1189
f6737cde
GM
1190*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1191in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1192the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1193
2f72fd2f
GM
1194*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1195replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1196directory.
1197
7381ae05
MB
1198*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1199a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1200This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1201will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1202accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1203
e024b101
GM
1204*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1205from ls switches.
1206
60b392a7
MB
1207*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1208of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1209which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1210source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1211
a933dad1
DL
1212** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1213use the -f option when sending mail.
1214
b1c609b1
GM
1215** CC mode changes.
1216
1217Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1218current user setups (although it's believed that these
1219incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1220However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1221back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1222compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1223release.
1224
7972fcfc
GM
1225*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1226This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1227of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1228non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1229want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1230have to bother.
1231
1232Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1233situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1234and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1235If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1236the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1237by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1238
b1c609b1
GM
1239*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1240When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1241variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1242take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1243is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1244settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1245possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1246Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1247
1248By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1249special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1250the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1251of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1252above.
1253
1254Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1255when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1256function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1257call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1258then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1259values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1260only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1261function documentation for more info.
1262
1263The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1264especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1265with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1266intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1267such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1268is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1269configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1270global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1271
1272(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1273
1274**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1275This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1276
1277This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1278variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1279completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1280the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1281empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1282style system.
1283
1284**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1285In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1286c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1287as far as possible.
1288
1289*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1290CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1291surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1292chapter about this in the manual.
1293
1294**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1295The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1296recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1297primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1298adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1299
1300**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1301This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1302c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1303
1304**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1305This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1306
1307It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1308Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1309A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1310inside CC Mode.
1311
1312Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1313causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1314the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1315available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1316cc-mode/).
1317
1318**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1319The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1320specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1321literals.
1322
1323**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1324It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1325prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1326you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1327this function.
1328
1329*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1330It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1331to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1332struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1333Thanks to Eric Eide.
1334
1335*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1336It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1337opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1338
1339**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1340
1341*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1342See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1343better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1344and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1345
1346*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1347previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1348the column specified by comment-column.
1349
1350*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1351In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1352is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1353prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1354contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1355don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1356
1357*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1358instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1359arguments.
1360
1361*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1362
1363*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1364c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1365c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1366variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1367Provan).
1368
1369*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1370
c407c570
GM
1371** Makefile mode changes
1372
1373*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1374
5d94f558 1375*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1376Fontlock mode is active.
1377
87be76f6
GM
1378** Isearch changes
1379
3353ef5a
GM
1380*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1381so that searches can be resumed.
1382
1383*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1384respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1385that started the search.
1386
87be76f6 1387*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1388selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1389
c8a8458a 1390+++
87be76f6
GM
1391*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1392
d35fce81 1393Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1394`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1395search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1396before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1397highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1398`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1399
1400The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1401will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1402Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1403using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1404usual snappy response.
1405
1406If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1407matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1408set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1409isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1410
21bc6203 1411+++
35384f06
GM
1412** Changes in sort.el
1413
1414The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1415as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1416new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1417numeric base.
87be76f6 1418
d7b511c4
GM
1419** Changes to Ange-ftp
1420
424d8b44 1421+++
d7b511c4 1422*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1423names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1424sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1425
d7b511c4
GM
1426*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1427ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1428
9d453139
SS
1429*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1430output ^M at the end of lines.
1431
4b9347b3
GM
1432** Shell script mode changes.
1433
1434Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1435derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1436sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1437
79214ddf
FP
1438** Etags changes.
1439
1440*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1441
aca0be23 1442*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1443possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1444{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1445This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1446a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1447
79214ddf
FP
1448*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1449declarations when given the --declarations option.
1450
1451*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1452"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1453
1454*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1455types.
1456
de370c4c 1457*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1458
1459*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1460
1461*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1462are now tagged.
1463
89d57763
FP
1464*** In makefiles, tags the targets.
1465
79214ddf
FP
1466*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1467variables are tagged.
1468
1469*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1470
8dc78b52
FP
1471*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1472for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1473
c8d94f86 1474+++
f6737cde
GM
1475** Changes in etags.el
1476
3f6e4b8b
GM
1477*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1478tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1479is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1480
f6737cde
GM
1481*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1482the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1483
1484If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1485FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1486TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1487obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1488
1489TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1490
1491FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1492List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1493
1494A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1495
1496 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1497 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1498 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1499
1500*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1501of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1502
1503*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1504names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1505
0c68ce6f
GM
1506*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1507If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1508/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
1509"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the filename,
1510point will go to the beginning of the file.
1511
424d8b44 1512+++
fbc164de
PE
1513** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1514and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1515LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1516
c3eb1f10 1517+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1518** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1519Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
15208859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1521GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
15228859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1523releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1524(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1525
732b9cdd
GM
1526+++
1527** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
89d57763 1528These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
732b9cdd
GM
1529of the tutorial.
1530
424d8b44 1531+++
163ea954 1532** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1533remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1534appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1535
1536** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1537
424d8b44 1538+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1539** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1540
6ab8d72d 1541+++
f6499c03 1542** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1543containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1544expression from that list, are not checked.
1545
5d94f558
SS
1546** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1547When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1548and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1549the buffer, just like for the local files.
1550
dc28878c
GM
1551** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1552
df8a9f78 1553+++
95931eb1
GM
1554** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1555displays local abbrevs, only.
1556
54baed30
GM
1557** VC Changes
1558
1559VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1560easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1561Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1562to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1563changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1564`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1565version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1566each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1567file is registered in that backend.
1568
1569When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1570backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1571directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1572master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1573the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1574As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1575
1576The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1577still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1578RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1579vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1580where it doesn't make sense.)
1581
1582The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1583obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1584`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1585
1586*** General Changes
1587
1588The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1589checks are always done now.
1590
327652be 1591VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1592operations.
1593
c286608e
SM
1594`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1595`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1596`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1597
22933be8
AS
1598The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1599first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1600current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1601the working file (``merge news'').
1602
1603The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1604(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1605downwards.
1606
1607*** Multiple Backends
1608
1609VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1610useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1611repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1612commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1613local RCS archives.
1614
1615To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1616should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1617backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1618`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1619
1620If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1621it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1622Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1623by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1624backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1625VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1626happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1627from the more remote backend.
1628
1629If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1630another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1631any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1632pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1633
1634After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1635changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1636local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1637buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1638
54baed30
GM
1639*** Changes for CVS
1640
1641There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1642default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1643remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1644by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1645regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1646that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1647queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1648
22933be8
AS
1649If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1650repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1651revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1652any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1653backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1654number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1655(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1656of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1657the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1658automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1659since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1660name.)
22933be8 1661
54baed30
GM
1662If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1663repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1664If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1665commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1666current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1667entire directory tree.
1668
1669The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1670"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1671is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1672"watched" by other developers.)
1673
22933be8
AS
1674The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1675(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1676an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1677starting at the given directory.
1678
54baed30
GM
1679*** Lisp Changes in VC
1680
1681VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1682add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1683library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1684then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1685a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1686provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1687of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1688you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1689`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1690
732b9cdd
GM
1691*** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
1692SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1693terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1694See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1695
a933dad1
DL
1696** New modes and packages
1697
79b9f6e0
MB
1698*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1699automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1700the default is not applicable.
1701
b95b34e5
GM
1702*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1703rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1704shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1705
1706Features are:
1707
1708- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1709 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1710 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1711 | / \
1712
1713- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1714 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1715 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1716 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1717 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1718 you are drawing.
1719
1720- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1721 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1722
1723- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1724 flood-filling.
1725
1726- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1727 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1728 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1729 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1730
b95b34e5
GM
1731- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1732 also do without the mouse.
1733
1734- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1735 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1736 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1737 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1738 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1739
1740- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1741
1742 lines straight-lines
1743 rectangles squares
1744 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1745 ellipses circles
1746 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1747 spray-can setting size for spraying
1748 vaporize line vaporize lines
1749 erase characters erase rectangles
1750
1751 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1752 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1753 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1754 drawing.
1755
1756 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1757 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1758 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1759 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1760
1761- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1762 can be turned off).
1763
4473cdd9
JW
1764+++
1765*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1766implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1767It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1768functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1769history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1770will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1771the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1772rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1773all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1774
ff332647 1775+++
90cbf47e
GM
1776*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1777intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1778typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1779on certain projects.
1780
894ca69e 1781+++
90cbf47e 1782*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1783regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1784
d96d6bb0 1785 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1786
1787will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1788face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1789typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1790Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1791appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1792current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1793corresponding file is read.
1794
424d8b44 1795+++
d96d6bb0 1796*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1797Emacs is idle.
1798
31fc5d15
GM
1799*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1800parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1801
5cb6a58e
SM
1802*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1803package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1804be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1805`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1806comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1807
424d8b44 1808+++
578979ee
GM
1809*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1810facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1811separate Texinfo file.
1812
424d8b44
DL
1813+++
1814*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1815by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1816provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1817`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1818enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1819
424d8b44 1820+++
6abca616
EZ
1821*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1822without invoking external programs.
1823
1824The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1825and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1826`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1827is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1828Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1829
1830The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1831page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1832
719e2c6e 1833+++
5e5dff44
GM
1834*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1835authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1836
1837The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1838the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1839the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1840Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1841even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1842single step.
1843
1844On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1845matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1846probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1847contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1848
424d8b44 1849+++
f7136ee8
GM
1850*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1851unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1852actually modifying content of a buffer.
1853
bbd9b566
GM
1854*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1855PostScript.
1856
1857Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1858
1859The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1860
1861 ; comment (until end of line)
1862 A non-terminal
1863 "C" terminal
1864 ?C? special
1865 $A default non-terminal
1866 $"C" default terminal
1867 $?C? default special
1868 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1869 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1870 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1871 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1872 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1873 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1874 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1875 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1876 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1877 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1878 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1879 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1880 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1881 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1882 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1883
1884Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1885
99453a38
GM
1886*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1887align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1888determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1889example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1890equal signs of assignments.
1891
424d8b44 1892+++
559cee90
DL
1893*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1894paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1895
424d8b44 1896+++
6448a6b3
GM
1897*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1898list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1899buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1900customize the package.
1901
6344985d
GM
1902*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1903
249652b1
GM
1904*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1905replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1906is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1907and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1908not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1909which answers different needs.
1910
424d8b44 1911+++
3476b54a
GM
1912*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1913suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1914expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1915course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1916reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1917to be enabled.
1918
424d8b44 1919+++
8964fec7
SM
1920*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1921containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1922
424d8b44 1923+++
a933dad1
DL
1924*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1925
424d8b44 1926+++
a933dad1
DL
1927*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1928
1929*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1930
0cb146bf 1931Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
8901d1ac
GM
1932`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1933disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1934`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1935displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1936and background colors.
1937
a933dad1
DL
1938*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1939Pascal) language.
1940
f6499c03 1941+++
a933dad1
DL
1942*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1943the text at point.
1944
1945*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1946
424d8b44 1947+++
8d54eb69
DL
1948*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1949
732b9cdd
GM
1950*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
1951whitespace in a file.
a933dad1 1952
ebcfda83
GM
1953*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1954files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1955(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1956interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1957often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1958uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1959codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1960
1961*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1962
1963Here is an example of columns:
1964
1965horse apple bus
1966dog pineapple car EXTRA
1967porcupine strawberry airplane
1968
1969Doing the following settings:
1970
1971 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1972 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1973 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1974 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1975
1976
1977Selecting the lines above and typing:
1978
1979 M-x delimit-columns-region
1980
1981It results:
1982
1983[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1984[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1985[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1986
1987delim-col has the following options:
1988
1989 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1990 before all columns.
1991
1992 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1993 between each column.
1994
1995 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1996 after all columns.
1997
1998 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1999 each column.
2000
2001delim-col has the following commands:
2002
2003 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
2004 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
2005
424d8b44 2006+++
f507826c 2007*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
2008were operated on recently.
2009
2010M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 2011
31fc5d15
GM
2012M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
2013recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 2014
31fc5d15
GM
2015M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
2016filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
2017file list can be displayed:
f507826c 2018
31fc5d15
GM
2019- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
2020- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
2021- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 2022
31fc5d15
GM
2023The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2024dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 2025
8062f458
DL
2026*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2027text.
2028
424d8b44 2029+++
36e24b82 2030*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
2031of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2032specific to Message mode.
2033
424d8b44 2034+++
36e24b82
DL
2035*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2036viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2037with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2038
424d8b44 2039+++
aaa659ef
DL
2040*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2041interface to access directory servers using different directory
2042protocols. It has a separate manual.
2043
eee54b0e
DL
2044*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2045for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2046
424d8b44 2047+++
612839b6
GM
2048*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2049
5d94f558 2050*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2051minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2052
399da7e3
DL
2053*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2054with the diary features.
2055
6e417ca5
DL
2056*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2057numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2058
4a27bdfb
GM
2059*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2060Fill mode.
2061
60dd7e0e
DL
2062*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2063Gnus facilities.
2064
dace60cf
JW
2065*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2066facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2067difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2068they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2069
965bc065
DL
2070+++
2071** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2072paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2073
2074+++
2075** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2076to be visited as images.
2077
a933dad1
DL
2078** Withdrawn packages
2079
2080*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2081functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2082
3261c1d8
DL
2083*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2084
2085*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23 2086
0cb146bf 2087
01242779
DL
2088* Incompatible Lisp changes
2089
2090There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2091may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
3b6936cc 2092See the sections below for details.
01242779 2093
89d57763 2094** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
3b6936cc
DL
2095`(format %s foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
2096Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'.
01242779
DL
2097
2098** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2099which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2100may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2101these properties are active.
2102
4dd4cc14 2103** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2104ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2105
2106** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2107buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2108make a difference to some code.
2109
4dd4cc14
DL
2110** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2111operates on the minibuffer.
2112
7c94ccf6
EZ
2113** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2114cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2115different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2116(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2117Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2118character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2119multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2120encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2121reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2122sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2123a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2124the buffer as multibyte characters.
2125
2126Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2127MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2128appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2129
7a39158f 2130** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
3280fbe8
EZ
2131`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2132`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7a39158f
DL
2133
2134** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2135long promised.
2136
2a64f8c2
DL
2137** `scroll-left' and `scroll-right' are only effective when
2138`automatic-hscrolling' is nil.
2139
0cb146bf 2140
ce75fd23
GM
2141* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2142(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2143
a758f97d
GM
2144** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of of
2145function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2146args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2147(signal or normal termination).
2148
023045d6
DL
2149+++
2150** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2151from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2152
eb1b0c74
GM
2153+++
2154** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2155to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2156
52d89894
GM
2157+++
2158** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2159alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2160
693c4692 2161** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2162
1c14ba45 2163+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2164** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2165deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2166being deleted.
2167
1c14ba45 2168+++
39e776cd
SM
2169** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2170
a18a342d 2171+++
1396138a 2172** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2173If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2174skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2175with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2176C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2177charset.
2178
4fbdfdcf
MB
2179+++
2180** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2181the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2182message.
2183
6a0b0752
MB
2184** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2185expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2186
1c14ba45 2187+++
47e351a3
GM
2188** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2189with the more general `:mask' property.
2190
1c14ba45 2191+++
f864120f 2192** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
ba9eeda1 2193
a2bd77b8
GM
2194** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2195backslash.
2196
424d8b44
DL
2197+++
2198** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2199is running in batch mode. For example,
2200
2201 (message "%s" (read t))
2202
2203will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2204to standard output.
2205
2206+++
2207** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2208`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2209
ead53494
GM
2210** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2211will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2212frame or window.
2213
f6499c03 2214+++
27848c01
GM
2215** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2216were added
2217
2218- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2219
2220Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2221a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2222
2223- Function: remq ELT LIST
2224
2225Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2226comparison is done with `eq'.
2227
1c14ba45 2228+++
27848c01 2229** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2230
b548072f
GM
2231** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2232has been changed.
2233
424d8b44 2234+++
07b14857
KH
2235** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2236without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2237convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2238
1c14ba45 2239+++
9662da0b
GM
2240** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2241or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2242
7fce7efb
DL
2243** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2244function was declared obsolete.
2245
1c14ba45 2246+++
5d94f558 2247** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2248retained as an alias).
2249
f98d3086
SM
2250** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2251It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2252is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2253
87efd256
GM
2254** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2255
39b39373
GM
2256- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2257
2258Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2259omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2260the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2261even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2262minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2263means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2264
67c9a1d2
GM
2265** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2266
2267- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2268
2269Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2270
2271This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2272calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2273argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2274value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2275returned.
2276
2277Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2278if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2279it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2280minibuffer even if it is active.
2281
2282Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2283counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2284too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2285and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2286`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2287entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2288
2289ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2290ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2291ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2292ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2293ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2294If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2295Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2296
ead53494
GM
2297** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2298event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2299argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2300
25fa6deb
GM
2301** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2302call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2303message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2304Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2305
5d94f558 2306** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2307meaning no limit.
2308
5d94f558 2309** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2310coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2311DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2312
9b2999d0
DL
2313+++
2314** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2315list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2316
c286608e
SM
2317** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2318
9b2999d0 2319+++
80c05bd3
DL
2320** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2321buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2322This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2323than replacing the local map.
2324
14fd0da3
DL
2325** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2326`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2327removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2328instead.
45f485a6
GM
2329
2330** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2331
f6499c03 2332+++
c286608e
SM
2333** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2334as promised long ago.
f0298744 2335
5d94f558 2336** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
0cb146bf 2337
a933dad1
DL
2338* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2339
2340Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2341--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2342When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2343so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2344
85c75536
MB
2345*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2346buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2347the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2348restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2349
0b8a3a6d
DL
2350*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2351`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2352when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2353multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2354
2355*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2356`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2357contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2358
2359*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2360changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2361[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2362regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2363the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2364extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2365bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2366eight-bit-graphic.
2367
2368** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2369
2370A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2371a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2372character set as previously.
2373
2374*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2375They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2376modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2377
2378CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2379characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2380range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2381case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2382
2383FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2384name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2385
2386*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2387registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2388"fontset-default".
2389
2390*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2391argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2392
2393** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2394composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2395buffers and strings.
2396
2397*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2398character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2399code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2400have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2401composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2402composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2403The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2404also been deleted.
2405
2406*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2407specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2408`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2409
2410*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2411MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2412composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2413may differ between buffer and string text.
2414
2415*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2416COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2417
2418*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2419directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2420Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2421`composition' from STRING.
2422
2423*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2424a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2425
2426*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2427obsolete.
2428
965bc065 2429** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2430`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2431for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2432U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2433
23cfab61
KH
2434** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' is added. It provides a limited
2435support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For the detail, please see
2436the documentation of this coding system.
2437
0b8a3a6d
DL
2438** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2439`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2440X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2441
2442+++
2443** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2444are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 24450xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2446
399da7e3 2447+++
f0124b4a
DL
2448** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2449that offset in the file before writing.
2450
f98d3086
SM
2451** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2452compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2453
612839b6
GM
2454** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2455`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2456from which the command was issued.
2457
2458** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2459`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2460`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2461additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2462operate on.
2463
271b4185
GM
2464** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2465to `window-buffer-height'.
2466
2467- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2468
2469Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2470The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2471lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2472
2473Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2474respectively.
2475
2476If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2477COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2478
2479The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2480obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2481on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2482
2483Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2484buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2485possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2486is currently displayed in some window.
2487
3c30cb6e
DL
2488** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2489argument function's results.
2490
62f20204
GM
2491** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2492signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2493
c0510d27 2494** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2495header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2496
2497** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2498ignores differences in case and text representation.
2499
2500** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2501cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2502as follows:
2503
2504 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2505 nil don't display a cursor
2506 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2507 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2508 others display a box cursor.
2509
9a0dd3dc
GM
2510** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2511an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2512defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2513set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2514
d7b511c4 2515** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2516specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2517the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2518text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2519
2520Example:
2521
2522 (string-to-syntax "()")
2523 => (4 . 41)
2524
1fa28578
GM
2525** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2526other than 10.
2527
2528*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2529INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2530
5d94f558 2531 #b1111
1fa28578 2532 => 15
5d94f558 2533 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2534 => -15
2535
2536*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2537
5d94f558 2538 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2539 => 438
2540
2541*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2542
5d94f558 2543 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2544 => 48815
2545
2546*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2547
5d94f558 2548 #2R-111
1fa28578 2549 => -7
5d94f558 2550 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2551 => 267
2552
3d4ff2dd 2553** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2554the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2555and isn't a string.
2556
3d4ff2dd
GM
2557** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2558a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2559value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2560not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2561
16ce590d
DL
2562+++
2563** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2564
73825616 2565** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2566for a regexp in a string.
2567
2568** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2569`mouse-position-function'.
2570
723e779c
GM
2571** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2572that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2573
d1e103b2
GM
2574** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2575Keywords are now always considered constants.
2576
31047e0d
DL
2577+++
2578** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2579returns it.
2580
7a85e4df
GM
2581** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2582returned by function `recent-keys'.
2583
02b14400
RS
2584+++
2585** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2586can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2587Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2588etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2589mode.
404fa7d6 2590
02b14400 2591+++
8964fec7
SM
2592** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2593and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2594
02b14400
RS
2595+++
2596** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2597has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2598function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2599returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2600been performed."
2601
2602When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2603and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2604hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2605then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2606
02b14400 2607+++
81da8b32
GM
2608** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2609In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2610and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2611
02b14400 2612+++
9e207b90
GM
2613** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2614with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2615specified table.
2616
2617 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2618
2619Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2620TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2621saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2622what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2623
02b14400 2624+++
d7f89643 2625** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2626Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2627Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2628corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2629Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2630
02b14400 2631+++
dde9e75a
GM
2632** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2633removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2634
02b14400 2635+++
9da30515
GM
2636** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2637instead of being optional.
2638
02b14400 2639+++
d20679eb
GM
2640** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2641modify read-only text.
2642
02b14400 2643+++
fbc164de
PE
2644** New functions and variables for locales.
2645
2646The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2647decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2648time functions like strftime. The new variables
2649`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2650locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2651
2652The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2653environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2654the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2655environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2656not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2657`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2658`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2659
02b14400 2660+++
863476d1
SM
2661** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2662To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2663modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2664start sequences.
2665
02b14400 2666+++
ef6d912c
GM
2667** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2668because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2669
02b14400 2670+++
a933dad1
DL
2671** New function `propertize'
2672
2673The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2674strings with text properties.
2675
2676- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2677
2678Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2679by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2680PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2681specified value of that property. Example:
2682
2683 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2684
2685+++
2686** push and pop macros.
2687
02b14400
RS
2688Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2689are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2690as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2691
2692(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2693(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2694 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2695
02b14400
RS
2696** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2697
6c7fd5aa
RS
2698Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2699are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2700
2701(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2702 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2703 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2704 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2705
2706(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2707 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2708 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2709 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2710
a933dad1 2711+++
6c083b4c
GM
2712** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2713[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2714class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2715or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2716
2717[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2718[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2719[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2720[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2721[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2722 space, and DEL.
2723[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2724 and DEL.
2725[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2726 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2727 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2728[:alpha:] matches letters.
2729 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2730 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2731[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2732[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2733[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2734[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2735 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2736 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2737[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2738[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2739[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2740
2741+++
2742** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2743
2744The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2745
2746- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2747
2748The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2749are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2750
2751:test TEST
2752
2753TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2754Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2755it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2756
2757:size SIZE
2758
2759SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2760many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2761
2762:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2763
2764REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2765full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2766size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
27671.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2768old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2769
2770:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2771
2772THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2773hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2774(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2775
2776:weakness WEAK
2777
b548072f
GM
2778WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2779`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2780`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2781collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2782outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2783
2784- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2785
2786Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2787
2788- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2789
2790Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2791
2792- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2793
2794Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2795values are shared.
2796
2797- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2798
2799Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2800
2801- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2802
2803Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2804
2805- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2806
2807Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2808
2809- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2810
2811Returns the size of TABLE.
2812
d96d6bb0 2813- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2814
2815Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2816
2817- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2818
2819Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2820
2821- Function: clrhash TABLE
2822
2823Clear TABLE.
2824
2825- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2826
2827Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2828not found.
2829
79214ddf 2830- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2831
2832Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2833another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2834
2835- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2836
2837Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2838
2839- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2840
2841Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2842arguments KEY and VALUE.
2843
2844- Function: sxhash OBJ
2845
2846Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2847
2848- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2849
2850Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2851a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2852comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2853and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2854of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2855
2856TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2857
2858HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2859code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2860integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2861
2862Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2863be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2864
2865 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2866 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2867
2868 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2869 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2870
79214ddf 2871 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2872 'case-fold-string-hash))
2873
2874 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2875
2876+++
2877** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2878
2879It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2880circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2881a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2882
2883+++
2884** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2885
2886If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2887#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2888
a933dad1
DL
2889+++
2890** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2891t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2892specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2893is too short to reach that column.
2894
2895+++
2896** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2897now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2898after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2899two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2900
2901If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2902perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2903and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2904
2905+++
2906** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2907to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2908
2909+++
2910** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2911calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2912
2913+++
2914** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2915directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2916small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2917small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2918temporary-file-directory instead.
2919
2920+++
2921** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2922the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2923`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2924hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2925
2926+++
2927** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2928elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2929
2930+++
2931** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2932
2933make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2934creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2935ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2936
2937+++
2938** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2939
2940The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2941on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2942is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2943never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2944ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2945overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2946
2947If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2948that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2949to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2950The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2951
2952+++
2953** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2954
2955Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2956If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2957ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2958result string.
2959
2960Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2961string where arguments appear in the result string.
2962
2963Example:
2964
2965 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2966 (s2 "world"))
2967 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2968 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2969 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2970
2971results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2972
2973+++
2974** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2975
2976Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2977The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2978argument in it.
2979
2980 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2981 (arg "world"))
2982 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2983 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2984 (message msg arg))
2985
2986+++
2987** Sound support
2988
2989Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2990(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2991
2992Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2993(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2994to enable sound support.
2995
2996Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2997list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2998when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2999functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3000sound to play, before playing the sound.
3001
3002The following sound properties are supported:
3003
3004- `:file FILE'
3005
3006FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3007searched relative to `data-directory'.
3008
6fb40beb
GM
3009- `:data DATA'
3010
3011DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3012may be present, but not both.
3013
a933dad1
DL
3014- `:volume VOLUME'
3015
3016VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
30170..1. This property is optional.
3018
01242779
DL
3019- `:device DEVICE'
3020
3021DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3022sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3023
a933dad1
DL
3024Other properties are ignored.
3025
01242779
DL
3026An alternative interface is called as
3027(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3028
a933dad1 3029** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 3030
9b2999d0 3031+++
356673d4
DL
3032** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3033a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
3034
3035** Changes to garbage collection
3036
3037*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3038of live and free strings.
3039
3040*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3041strings that have been consed so far.
3042
0cb146bf 3043
04545643
GM
3044* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3045Lisp Manual
3046
f7eb32aa 3047+++
a299a6f0
GM
3048** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3049mini-windows.
3050
9b2999d0 3051+++
26fcde61
MB
3052** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3053argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3054returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3055
a299a6f0 3056** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3057
9a8d84ca
DL
3058+++
3059** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3060
9b2999d0 3061+++
2c69ced2
GM
3062** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3063image.
3064
3065- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3066
3067Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3068
3069SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3070measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3071character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3072font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3073FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3074
9b2999d0 3075+++
ebb8f116
GM
3076** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3077has a mask bitmap.
3078
3079- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3080
3081Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3082FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3083or omitted means use the selected frame.
3084
f6499c03 3085+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3086** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3087satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3088
3089+++
3090** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3091optional.
3092
f6499c03
DL
3093+++
3094** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3095below).
04545643 3096
0cb146bf 3097
a933dad1
DL
3098* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3099
3100Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3101--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3102When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3103so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3104
f6d3257b
GM
3105** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3106to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3107
3108Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3109text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3110is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3111your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3112laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3113just display it black instead.
3114
3115This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3116a line like
3117
3118 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3119
3120in your `.emacs'.
3121
a933dad1
DL
3122** New face implementation.
3123
3124Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3125font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3126
3127+++
3128*** New faces.
3129
3130Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3131
3132 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3133
a933dad1
DL
3134 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3135 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3136
a933dad1 3137 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3138
a933dad1 3139 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3140
a933dad1 3141 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3142
a933dad1 3143 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3144
a933dad1
DL
3145 7. Background color.
3146
3147 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3148
3149 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3150
3151 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3152
3153 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3154
3155 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3156 color.
3157
3158 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3159 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3160
3161Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3162same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3163frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3164faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
3165with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
3166attributes mentioned above.
3167
3168There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3169definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3170created frames.
79214ddf 3171
a933dad1
DL
3172A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3173have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3174`fully-specified'.
3175
3176+++
3177*** Face merging.
3178
3179The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3180combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3181aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3182properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3183that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3184results in a fully-specified face.
3185
3186+++
3187*** Face realization.
3188
3189After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3190merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3191realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3192available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3193face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3194cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3195
3196Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3197character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3198for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3199charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3200
3201Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3202specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3203being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3204the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3205statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3206
3207In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3208`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
32090x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3210the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3211initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3212Emacs.
3213
3214Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3215`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3216registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3217with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3218
a7c13351 3219+++
a933dad1
DL
3220**** Clearing face caches.
3221
3222The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3223on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3224unused fonts.
3225
3226+++
3227*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3228
a933dad1
DL
3229Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3230given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3231for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3232
3233If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3234pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3235family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3236property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3237an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3238
3239Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3240against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3241match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3242
3243Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3244
3245The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3246attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3247face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3248names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3249that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3250width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3251to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3252
52d89894
GM
3253Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3254alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
89d57763 3255doesn't exist.
af4bb4c8
KH
3256
3257Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3258all alternative font registry names to try for a face speciying a
3259registry.
3260
3261Please note that the iterpretations of the above two variables are
3262slightly different.
3263
3264Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3265
a933dad1
DL
3266
3267+++
3268**** Scalable fonts
3269
3270Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3271since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3272servers.
3273
3274To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3275`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3276scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3277Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3278scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3279that list. Example:
3280
3281 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3282
3283allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3284
3285+++
3286*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3287
3288- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3289
3290Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3291is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3292string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3293
3294If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3295the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3296FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3297POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3298SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3299These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3300if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3301REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3302the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3303of the face font sort order.
3304
79214ddf 3305- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3306
3307Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3308omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3309(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3310non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3311
3312- Variable: font-list-limit
3313
3314Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3315won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3316matching font. The default is currently 100.
3317
3318+++
3319*** Setting face attributes.
3320
3321For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3322with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3323implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3324`face-attribute'.
3325
3326Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3327symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3328
3329The following attributes are recognized:
3330
3331`:family'
3332
3333VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3334or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3335and `?' are allowed.
3336
3337`:width'
3338
3339VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3340It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3341`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3342`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3343
3344`:height'
3345
787345ff
MB
3346VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3347in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3348scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3349height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3350
3351`:weight'
3352
3353VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3354symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3355`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3356
3357`:slant'
3358
3359VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3360symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3361`reverse-oblique'.
3362
3363`:foreground', `:background'
3364
3365VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3366
3367`:underline'
3368
3369VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3370VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3371a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3372don't underline.
3373
3374`:overline'
3375
3376VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3377VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3378string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3379overline.
3380
3381`:strike-through'
3382
3383VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3384striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3385face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3386is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3387
3388`:box'
3389
3390VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3391around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3392VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3393of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3394and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3395VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3396:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3397the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3398specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3399defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3400the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3401color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3402should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3403like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3404that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3405the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3406box.
3407
3408`:inverse-video'
3409
3410VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3411inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3412
3413`:stipple'
3414
3415If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3416The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3417searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3418HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3419is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3420explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3421
3422For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3423and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3424
3425`:font'
3426
3427Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3428XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3429is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3430versions of Emacs.
3431
3432For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3433be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3434must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3435
3436Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3437`defface'.
3438
787345ff
MB
3439`:inherit'
3440
3441VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3442of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3443like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3444
a933dad1
DL
3445*** Face attributes and X resources
3446
3447The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3448from X resources:
3449
3450 Face attribute X resource class
3451-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3452 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3453 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3454 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3455 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3456 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3457 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3458 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3459 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3460 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3461 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3462 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3463 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3464 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3465 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3466 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3467 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3468 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3469 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3470 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3471
3472+++
3473*** Text property `face'.
3474
3475The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3476specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3477specification can be
3478
34791. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3480
34812. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3482 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3483 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3484 for face attribute names.
3485
34863. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3487 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3488 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3489
3490+++
3491** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3492
acf3ecb7
EZ
3493The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3494on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3495the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3496default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3497`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3498used to clear the mapping table.
3499
acf3ecb7
EZ
3500** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3501
3502The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3503and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3504type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3505color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3506display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3507old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3508`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3509compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3510should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3511modify their color-related behavior.
3512
3513The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3514any frame type.
3515
8a5719f0
EZ
3516** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3517
3518The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3519`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3520`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3521`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3522`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3523`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3524display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3525the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3526platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3527
a933dad1
DL
3528+++
3529** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3530
463cac2d 3531This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3532To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3533the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3534`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3535
3536The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3537end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3538Otherwise, it returns zero.
3539
463cac2d
GM
3540** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3541
3542There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3543buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3544property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3545
9a9dfda8 3546Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3547forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3548to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3549not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3550commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3551boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3552`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3553functions.
463cac2d
GM
3554
3555Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3556a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3557editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3558
9a9dfda8
GM
3559The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3560
59927f88 3561- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3562
3563Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3564
9a9dfda8
GM
3565A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3566If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3567constrained position if that is is different.
3568
3569If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3570positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3571ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3572constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3573as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3574is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3575fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3576the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3577also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3578
3579If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3580NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3581unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3582C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3583only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3584
59927f88
MB
3585If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3586a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3587
3588Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3589
3590- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3591
59927f88 3592Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3593A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3594If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3595
3596- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3597
3598Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3599A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3600If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3601If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3602field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3603
3604- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3605
3606Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3607A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3608If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3609If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3610then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3611
3612- Function: field-string &optional POS
3613
3614Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3615A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3616If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3617
3618- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3619
3620Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3621A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3622If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3623
a933dad1
DL
3624+++
3625** Image support.
3626
3627Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3628strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3629(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3630replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3631
3632If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3633`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3634AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3635window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3636area.
3637
3638IMAGE is an image specification.
3639
3640*** Image specifications
3641
3642Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3643is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3644specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3645symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3646described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3647
3648The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3649
3650`:ascent ASCENT'
3651
576da55d
GM
3652ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3653If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3654to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3655
3656If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3657image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3658
5d94f558 3659If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3660centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3661of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3662overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3663
3664`:margin MARGIN'
3665
b30623be
GM
3666MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
3667as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
3668horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
a933dad1
DL
3669
3670`:relief RELIEF'
3671
3672RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3673around an image.
3674
f864120f 3675`:conversion ALGO'
a933dad1 3676
47e351a3
GM
3677Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3678
3679ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3680edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3681
3682ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3683apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3684nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3685position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3686around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3687neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3688transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3689x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3690below.
3691
3692 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3693 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3694 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3695
3696The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3697resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3698multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3699of the factors' absolute values.
3700
327652be 3701Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3702
47e351a3
GM
3703 (1 0 0
3704 0 0 0
3705 9 9 -1)
3706
3707Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3708
3709 ( 2 -1 0
3710 -1 0 1
3711 0 1 -2)
3712
ba9eeda1
GM
3713ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3714``disabled''.
3715
47e351a3
GM
3716`:mask MASK'
3717
3718If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3719the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3720image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3721background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3722image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3723the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3724GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3725image.
a933dad1 3726
47e351a3
GM
3727If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3728in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3729`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3730
3731`:file FILE'
3732
3733Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3734search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3735building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3736may be present in the image specification.
3737
518df5c4
GM
3738`:data DATA'
3739
3740Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3741supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3742present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3743support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3744
a933dad1
DL
3745*** Supported image types
3746
b246b1f6 3747**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3748
3749XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3750properties supported are
3751
3752`:foreground FG'
3753
3754FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3755is the frame's foreground.
3756
46c5af7f 3757`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3758
3759BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3760the frame's background color.
3761
3762XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3763case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3764instead of a `:file' property.
3765
3766`:width WIDTH'
3767
3768WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3769
3770`:height HEIGHT'
3771
3772HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3773
3774`:data DATA'
3775
3776DATA must be either
3777
3778 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3779 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3780
3781 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3782
3783 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3784 bitmap.
3785
c76e04a8
GM
3786 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3787 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3788 in the file.
3789
a933dad1
DL
3790**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3791
3792XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3793`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3794found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3795`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3796
3797Additional image properties supported are:
3798
3799`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3800
3801SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3802name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3803name.
3804
3805XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3806add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3807
a933dad1
DL
3808The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3809to display compressed images.
3810
3811**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3812
3813PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3814mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3815mono images are
3816
3817`:foreground FG'
3818
3819FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3820is the frame's foreground.
3821
3822`:background FG'
3823
3824BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3825the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3826
3827**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3828
3829Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3830package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3831are:
3832
a933dad1
DL
3833**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3834
3835Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3836package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3837properties defined.
3838
3839**** GIF, image type `gif'
3840
3841Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3842`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3843
3844Additional image properties supported are:
3845
3846`:index INDEX'
3847
3848INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3849multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3850
3851This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3852For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3853at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3854every 0.1 seconds.
3855
3856(defun show-anim (file max)
3857 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3858 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3859
3860(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3861 (when (= idx max)
3862 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3863 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3864 (save-excursion
3865 (set-buffer buffer)
3866 (goto-char (point-min))
3867 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3868 (insert-image img "x"))
3869 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3870
3871**** PNG, image type `png'
3872
3873Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3874package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3875properties defined.
3876
3877**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3878
3879Additional image properties supported are:
3880
3881`:pt-width WIDTH'
3882
3883WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3884integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3885
3886`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3887
3888HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3889must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3890
3891`:bounding-box BOX'
3892
3893BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3894the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3895files. This is an required property.
3896
3897Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3898lisp/gs.el.
3899
3900*** Lisp interface.
3901
79214ddf
FP
3902The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3903which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3904
3905Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3906they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3907The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3908manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3909images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3910
3911*** Simplified image API, image.el
3912
3913The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3914creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3915can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3916define an image based on available image types. The functions
3917`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3918buffer.
3919
3920+++
3921** Display margins.
3922
3923Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3924and images.
3925
3926To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3927`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3928`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3929obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3930`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3931the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3932of the display margins.
3933
3934You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3935containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3936one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3937string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3938in this file).
3939
3940+++
3941** Help display
3942
3943Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3944moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3945`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3946that have a `help-echo' property.
3947
9662da0b 3948If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3949is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3950the window in which the help was found.
3951
3952If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3953`help-echo' text property was found.
3954
3955If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3956POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3957
3958If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3959the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3960mouse.
d5aa31d8 3961
9662da0b
GM
3962If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3963string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3964
3965For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3966determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3967property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3968For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3969used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3970
3971The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3972the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3973causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3974
3975+++
3976** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3977
3978The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3979This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3980
3981The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3982scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3983The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3984scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3985used.
3986
79214ddf
FP
3987 (global-set-key [A-down]
3988 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3989 (interactive)
79214ddf 3990 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3991 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3992 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3993 #'(lambda ()
3994 (interactive)
79214ddf 3995 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3996 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3997
3998+++
3999** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4000
4001Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4002when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4003variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4004is called with one argument, POS.
4005
4006At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4007characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4008as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4009property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4010`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4011
4012+++
4013** Tool bar support.
4014
4015Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4016parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4017controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4018suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4019`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4020automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4021
4022*** Tool bar item definitions
4023
4024Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4025`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4026where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 4027
a933dad1
DL
4028CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4029evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4030the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4031property (see below).
79214ddf 4032
a933dad1
DL
4033BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4034binding are currently ignored.
4035
4036The following properties are recognized:
4037
4038`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 4039
a933dad1
DL
4040FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4041or disabled.
79214ddf 4042
a933dad1 4043`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 4044
a933dad1 4045FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 4046
a933dad1
DL
4047`:filter FUNCTION'
4048
4049FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4050FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4051used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4052
a933dad1
DL
4053`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4054
4055TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4056and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4057
a933dad1
DL
4058`:image IMAGES'
4059
4060IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4061image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4062meaning of each of the four elements:
4063
4064 Index Use when item is
4065 ----------------------------------------
4066 0 enabled and selected
4067 1 enabled and deselected
4068 2 disabled and selected
4069 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4070
4ba7246d
GM
4071If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4072algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4073
a933dad1 4074`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4075
a933dad1
DL
4076Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4077is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4078
dab96841 4079The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4080toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4081to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4082menu bar.
dab96841 4083
8628686a
DL
4084The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4085dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4086buffer-locally to override the global map.
4087
a933dad1
DL
4088*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4089
4090If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4091resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4092than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4093
79214ddf 4094If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4095raised when the mouse moves over them.
4096
4097You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4098`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
b30623be
GM
4099pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4100vertical margins . Default is 1.
a933dad1
DL
4101
4102You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4103`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4104
4105*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4106
4107You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4108a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4109
4110 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4111 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4112 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4113
4114is the original tool bar item definition, then
4115
4116 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4117
4118makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4119item.
4120
4121** Mode line changes.
4122
4123+++
4124*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4125
4126The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4127that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4128a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4129
41301. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4131a `local-map' text property.
4132
41332. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4134that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4135
41363. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4137is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4138`local-map' property.
4139
4140The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4141properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4142example.
4143
54522c9f
GM
4144*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4145evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4146
a933dad1
DL
4147+++
4148*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4149variable mode-line-format to nil.
4150
4151+++
4152*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4153
4154This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4155`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4156completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4157`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4158line.
4159
4160The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4161`header-line'.
4162
4163The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4164position in the header-line.
4165
4166+++
4167** Text property `display'
4168
623a0aae
GM
4169The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4170replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4171also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4172the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4173below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4174
623a0aae
GM
4175*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4176
4177To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4178text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4179
4180If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4181marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4182the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4183is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4184simpler form STRING as property value.
4185
a933dad1
DL
4186*** Variable width and height spaces
4187
4188To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4189specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4190`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4191area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4192marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4193displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4194simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4195
4196The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4197PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4198properties described below.
4199
4200The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4201characters having the `display' property.
4202
4203- :width WIDTH
4204
4205Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4206character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4207
4208- :relative-width FACTOR
4209
4210Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4211first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4212same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4213width of that character by FACTOR.
4214
4215- :align-to HPOS
4216
4217Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4218value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4219
4220Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4221
4222- :height HEIGHT
4223
4224Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4225normal line height.
4226
4227- :relative-height FACTOR
4228
4229The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4230of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4231
4232- :ascent ASCENT
4233
4234Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4235used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4236baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4237equal to 100.
4238
4239You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4240
4241*** Images
4242
4243A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4244. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4245in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4246their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4247the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4248`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4249area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4250the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4251as display specification.
4252
4253*** Other display properties
4254
c9e73000 4255- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4256
4257Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4258should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4259integer or float.
4260
c9e73000 4261- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4262
4263Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4264
4265If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4266means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4267the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4268``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4269a font is available counts as a step.
4270
4271If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4272as tall as the frame's default font.
4273
4274If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4275height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4276
4277Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4278`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4279
c9e73000 4280- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4281
4282FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4283font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4284raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4285amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4286`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4287
4288*** Conditional display properties
4289
4290All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4291has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4292applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4293During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4294the text having the `display' property.
4295
4296The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4297`(:when t SPEC)'.
4298
4299+++
4300** New menu separator types.
4301
4302Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4303item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4304treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4305to specify other menu separator types.
4306
4307- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4308
4309No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4310separator occurs.
4311
4312- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4313
4314A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4315
4316- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4317
4318A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4319
4320- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4321
4322A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4323
4324- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4325
4326A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4327
4328- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4329
4330A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4331displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4332
4333- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4334
4335A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4336
4337- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4338
4339A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4340
4341- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4342
4343A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4344
4345- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4346
4347Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4348
4349- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4350
4351Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4352
4353- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4354
4355Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4356
4357- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4358
4359Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4360
4361Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4362the corresponding single-line separators.
4363
4364+++
4365** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4366
4367The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4368`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4369Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4370that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4371default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4372default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4373default foreground is black.
4374
4375The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4376(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4377`ScrollBarBackground').
4378
4379Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4380settings for scroll bar colors.
4381
4382+++
4383** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4384display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4385
4386---
4387** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4388starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4389on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4390line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4391the original window start.
4392
4393---
4394** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4395`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4396now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4397
4398+++
4399** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4400
4401A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4402`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4403windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4404other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4405
4406The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4407fixed-width and fixed-height.
4408
4409 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4410
4411A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4412fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4413window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4414change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4415temporarily to nil, for example
4416
4417 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4418 (enlarge-window 10))
4419
79214ddf 4420Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4421or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4422
4423** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4424terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4425to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4426overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4427horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4428support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4429
3787e12e 4430
0cb146bf 4431
3787e12e
GM
4432* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4433
4434** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4435input.
4436
4437** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4438
4439** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4440
4441** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4442only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4443exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4444(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4445(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4446
4447** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4448been added.
4449
0cb146bf 4450
3787e12e
GM
4451* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4452
4453** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4454
0cb146bf 4455
3787e12e
GM
4456* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4457
4458** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4459M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
0cb146bf 4460
3787e12e
GM
4461* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4462
4463** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4464
4465You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4466Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4467`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4468
4469If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4470is the one that is used.
4471
4472** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4473the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4474Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4475separate from the command's regular output.
4476Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4477says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4478In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4479the buffer name.
4480
4481When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4482output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4483it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4484cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4485
4486** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4487the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4488is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4489created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4490
4491** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4492example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4493match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4494quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4495
4496** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4497now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4498if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4499they never ignore case.
4500
4501** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4502under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4503applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4504of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4505just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4506convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4507part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4508
4509If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4510the same format that was used in the file before.
4511
4512You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4513`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4514
4515** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4516renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4517This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4518
4519** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4520The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4521buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4522your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4523is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4524end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4525Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4526
4527The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4528eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4529control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4530format. You can now customize these variables.
4531
4532** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4533filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4534filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4535enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4536
4537** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4538in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4539windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4540
4541** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4542dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4543doesn't have any effect.
4544
4545** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4546not one per buffer.
4547
4548** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4549use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4550 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4551
4552** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4553To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4554`auto-show-mode' command.
4555
4556** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4557avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4558versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4559choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4560occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4561
4562** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4563cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4564
4565** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4566character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4567feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4568
4569** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4570the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4571interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4572and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4573
4574** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4575
4576The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4577that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4578one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4579codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4580set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4581
4582Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4583from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4584
4585IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4586equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4587a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4588`?' on other systems.
4589
4590IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4591feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4592Unix.
4593
4594Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4595current codepage when it starts.
4596
4597** Mail changes
4598
4599*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4600`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4601appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4602non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4603MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4604headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4605latin-1:
4606
4607 MIME-version: 1.0
4608 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4609 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4610
4611*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4612default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4613default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4614sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4615buffer-file-coding-system.
4616
4617You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4618sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4619mail.
4620
4621*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4622if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4623Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4624list of possible coding systems.
4625
4626** CC Mode changes
4627
4628*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4629modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4630longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4631docstring for details.
4632
4633*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4634symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4635found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4636prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4637lineup functions use this feature currently.
4638
4639*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4640"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4641
4642*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4643"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4644
4645*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4646from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4647symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4648c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4649anonymous classes.
4650
4651*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4652syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4653
4654*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4655inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4656support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4657function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4658
4659*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4660(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4661brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4662c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4663(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4664
4665*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4666
4667*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4668
4669*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4670for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4671
4672*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4673
4674*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4675associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4676This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4677circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4678class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4679
4680** Gnus changes.
4681
4682*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4683added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4684Gnus manual for the full story.
4685
4686*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4687before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4688group, which is created automatically.
4689
4690*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4691values.
4692
4693*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4694
4695*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4696outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4697
4698*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4699`C-u C-c C-c'.
4700
4701*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4702
4703*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4704re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4705
4706*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4707
4708*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4709Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4710
4711*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4712`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4713
4714*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4715control over simplification.
4716
4717*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4718
4719*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4720limit.
4721
4722*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4723
4724*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4725
4726*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4727If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4728rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4729
4730*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4731`a' forces normal posting method.
4732
4733*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4734-- `W d'.
4735
4736*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4737to a non-nil value.
4738
4739*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4740where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4741
4742*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4743has been added.
4744
4745*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4746
4747*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4748
4749*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4750`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4751
4752*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4753`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4754
4755*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4756
4757*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4758been added.
4759
4760*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4761`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4762
4763*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4764updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4765
4766*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4767
4768*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4769
4770*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4771
4772** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4773
4774*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4775options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4776nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4777
4778*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4779TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4780of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4781TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4782can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4783
4784*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4785All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4786but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4787the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4788
4789*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4790the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4791buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4792mismatch.
4793
4794** Changes to RefTeX mode
4795
4796*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4797file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4798
4799*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4800lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4801characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4802removed from the label.
4803
4804*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4805a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4806
4807*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4808customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4809
4810*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4811`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4812expressions.
4813
4814*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4815
4816** New/deleted modes and packages
4817
4818*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4819SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4820
4821*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4822editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4823SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4824
4825*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4826changes with a special face.
4827
4828*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4829this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4830Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
0cb146bf 4831
3787e12e
GM
4832* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4833
4834** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4835This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4836conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4837and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4838check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4839
4840The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4841Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4842distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4843
4844** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4845MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4846controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4847directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4848Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4849on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4850string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4851program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4852printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4853
4854** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4855output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4856available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4857input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4858temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4859program.
4860
4861An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4862and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4863programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4864automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4865as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4866ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4867
4868** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4869a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4870MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4871was not documented clearly before.
4872
4873** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4874This includes Tetris and Snake.
0cb146bf 4875
3787e12e
GM
4876* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4877
4878** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4879return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4880They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4881meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4882
4883** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4884WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4885and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4886
4887** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4888
4889*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4890It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4891
4892*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4893the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4894integers.
4895
4896** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4897files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4898arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4899file names and attributes are returned.
4900
4901** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4902sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4903accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4904It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4905returns the result.
4906
4907** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4908to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4909
4910** New functions for base64 conversion:
4911
4912The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4913into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4914performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4915optionally.
4916
4917Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4918job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4919
4920**
4921The new function process-running-child-p
4922will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4923terminal to its own child process.
4924
4925** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4926when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4927to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4928itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4929
4930** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4931be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4932
4933** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4934:included is an alias for :visible.
4935
4936easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4937easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4938to move or copy menu entries.
4939
4940** Multibyte editing changes
4941
4942*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4943an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4944make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4945work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4946char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4947 (setq char (sref str idx)
4948 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4949The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4950
4951If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4952(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4953 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4954
4955*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4956region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4957deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4958
4959 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4960
4961This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4962across the boundary.
4963
4964*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4965`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4966 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4967 contains 8-bit characters.
4968 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4969 contains invalid characters.
4970
4971*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4972text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4973preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4974text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4975way.
4976
4977*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4978If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4979end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4980prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4981
4982*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4983compose Thai characters in a string.
4984
4985** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4986argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4987for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4988menus should always use the third argument.
4989
4990** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4991read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4992arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4993input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4994
4995** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4996of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4997programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4998inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4999
5000** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5001the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5002returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5003echo area contents.
5004
5005 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5006
5007** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5008NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5009requested feature cannot be loaded.
5010
5011** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5012foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5013means to clear out that attribute.
5014
5015** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5016gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5017
5018** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5019read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5020unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5021end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5022
5023** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5024the gap of the current buffer.
5025
5026** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5027to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5028current buffer.
5029
5030** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5031facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5032These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5033it back in after any modifications have been made.
0cb146bf 5034
3787e12e
GM
5035* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5036
5037** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5038the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5039/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5040directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5041subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5042
5043Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5044names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5045Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5046which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5047these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5048
5049Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5050starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5051time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5052
5053This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5054Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5055to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5056subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5057`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5058results.
5059
5060** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5061GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5062that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5063fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
0cb146bf 5064
3787e12e
GM
5065* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5066
5067** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5068including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5069it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5070perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5071
5072** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5073specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5074region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5075further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5076command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5077within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5078are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5079region.
5080
5081In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5082selective undo.
5083
5084** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5085unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5086buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5087effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5088Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5089
5090The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5091though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5092-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5093load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5094
5095** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5096no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5097enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5098something that most users not do.
5099
5100** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5101operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5102The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5103applications.
5104
5105C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5106pasting operations.
5107
5108** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5109setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5110like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5111printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5112`ps-printer-name'.
5113
5114** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5115minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5116any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5117except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5118incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5119hits a new word.
5120
5121Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5122Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5123to be confused by TeX commands.
5124
5125You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5126correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5127clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5128of various alternative replacements and actions.
5129
5130Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5131the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5132corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5133alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5134flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5135
5136Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5137flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5138
5139** Changes in input method usage.
5140
5141Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5142the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5143respectively.
5144
5145You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5146
5147If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5148of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5149
5150The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5151that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5152
5153 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5154
5155 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5156
5157 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5158 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5159
5160 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5161 given in the following case:
5162 o When you are using a complex input method.
5163 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5164
5165If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5166input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5167and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5168setting it to t is helpful.
5169
5170The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5171
5172In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5173keys:
5174 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5175 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5176 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5177These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5178environment.
5179
5180** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5181names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5182minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5183get
5184
5185 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5186
5187which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5188
5189Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5190Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5191
5192** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5193at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5194its owner and group.
5195
5196** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5197Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5198
5199** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5200contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5201
5202** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5203which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5204in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5205by the left edge of the rectangle.
5206
5207** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5208increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5209C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5210for writing keyboard macros.
5211
5212** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5213files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5214frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5215the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5216additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5217info.
5218
5219** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5220
5221** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5222query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5223contents only.
5224
5225** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5226confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5227the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5228says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5229
5230** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5231non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5232literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5233
5234** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5235now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5236Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5237inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5238
5239** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5240failure if the command produces no output.
5241
5242** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5243manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5244the mouse.
5245
5246** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5247mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5248function and variable names.
5249
5250** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5251reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5252file-coding-system-alist.
5253
5254** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5255t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5256converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5257the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5258according to the current fontset.
5259
5260** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5261
5262The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5263that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5264nonascii-insert-offset.
5265
5266For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5267enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5268nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5269characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5270
5271** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5272an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5273
5274** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5275letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5276
5277** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5278are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5279command keys.
5280
5281** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5282user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5283
5284Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5285user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5286all variables that have documentation.
5287
5288** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5289shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5290that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5291minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5292it should show; the default is 20.
5293
5294Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5295the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5296of your input.
5297
5298** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5299all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5300recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5301argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5302the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5303Newly added options are included as well.
5304
5305If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5306then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5307for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5308
5309This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5310Customize menu.
5311
5312** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5313the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5314
5315** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5316buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5317invoked.
5318
5319** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5320that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5321The default is 1.
5322
5323** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5324syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5325new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5326(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5327sensibly.
5328
5329** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5330
5331** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5332value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5333two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5334
5335** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5336reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5337for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5338every night.
5339
5340** Desktop changes
5341
5342*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5343the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5344
5345*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5346and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5347
5348** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5349read and post multi-lingual articles.
5350
5351** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5352doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5353be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5354outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5355the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5356made invisible again.
5357
5358** Mail reading and sending changes
5359
5360*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5361the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5362changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5363toggle.
5364
5365*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5366now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5367summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5368the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5369rmail-default-body-file.
5370
5371*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5372longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5373handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5374
5375*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5376it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5377is evaluated to insert the signature.
5378
5379*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5380outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5381handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5382putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5383transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5384especially interested in trying feedmail.
5385
5386feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5387feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5388provided by feedmail are:
5389
5390**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5391stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5392there is also a queue for draft messages
5393
5394**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5395be prompted for confirmation
5396
5397**** does smart filling of address headers
5398
5399**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5400the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5401can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5402
5403**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5404the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5405/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5406function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5407
5408** Dired changes
5409
5410*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5411files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5412
5413*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5414run Dired on the directory name at point.
5415
5416*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5417files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5418for a specified regexp.
5419
5420** VC Changes
5421
5422*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5423conveniently.
5424
5425*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5426faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5427Dired.
5428
5429VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5430directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5431listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5432currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5433
5434You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5435then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5436vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5437control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5438on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5439
5440All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5441is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5442`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5443the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5444`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5445
5446The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5447toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5448VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5449`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5450
5451Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5452ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5453command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5454
5455*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5456file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5457session to resolve them.
5458
5459Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5460resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5461contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5462uses as well).
5463
5464*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5465command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5466you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5467either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5468branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5469If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5470using ediff.
5471
5472** Changes in Font Lock
5473
5474*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5475are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5476use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5477unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5478compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5479
5480** Frame name display changes
5481
5482*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5483frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5484raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5485when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5486
5487*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5488frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5489menu.
5490
5491** Comint (subshell) changes
5492
5493*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5494subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5495with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5496
5497*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5498
5499C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5500that is, the line after the last line you got.
5501You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5502
5503C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5504send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5505the following line.
5506
5507C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5508which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5509previously sent input.
5510
5511C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5512it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5513as the search string.
5514
5515*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5516automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5517
5518** C mode changes
5519
5520*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5521and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5522assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5523definition.
5524
5525*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5526(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5527Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5528style is still the default however.
5529
5530*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5531
5532*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5533are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5534them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5535
5536*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5537and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5538
5539*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5540namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5541
5542*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5543makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5544
5545*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5546c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5547
5548*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5549should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5550package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5551variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5552
5553** Changes to hippie-expand.
5554
5555*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5556non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5557which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5558
5559*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5560non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5561expanding dynamically.
5562
5563*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5564non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5565
5566*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5567non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5568this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5569expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5570
5571*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5572
5573** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5574
5575*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5576bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5577automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5578bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5579against the first word in the title.
5580
5581*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5582capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5583bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5584lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5585lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5586bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5587
5588*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5589generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5590replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5591bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5592
5593** Changes in vcursor.el.
5594
5595*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5596and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5597variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5598entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5599`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5600in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5601
5602*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5603Editing group once the package is loaded.
5604
5605*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5606generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5607vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5608
5609*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5610vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5611
5612** Ispell changes.
5613
5614*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5615buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5616are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5617
5618*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5619A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5620and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5621defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5622include:
5623
5624 o URLs are automatically skipped
5625 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5626
5627*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5628
5629** Changes to RefTeX mode
5630
5631RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5632large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5633re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5634section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5635
5636*** New recursive parser.
5637
5638The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5639entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5640recursive parser scans the individual files.
5641
5642*** Parsing only part of a document.
5643
5644Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5645partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5646the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5647
5648 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5649
5650*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5651
5652This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5653
5654 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5655
5656*** Using multiple selection buffers
5657
5658If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5659for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5660
5661 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5662
5663*** References to external documents.
5664
5665The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5666documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5667documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5668macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5669RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5670the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5671The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5672
5673*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5674
5675The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5676and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5677
5678Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5679the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5680
5681*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5682
5683The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5684buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5685
5686*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5687
5688The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5689contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5690`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5691have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5692enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5693at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5694more.
5695
5696*** Support for the varioref package
5697
5698The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5699
5700*** New hooks
5701
5702Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5703and citations are created. These hooks are
5704`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5705`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5706
5707*** Citations outside LaTeX
5708
5709The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5710a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5711
5712*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5713
5714The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5715fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5716fontified, use
5717
5718 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5719
5720** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5721With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5722the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5723directories that contain the same file name.
5724
5725Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5726Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5727file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5728Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5729have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5730names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5731directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5732directory.
5733
5734** New modes and packages
5735
5736*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5737It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5738it, but some do not.
5739
5740*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5741code.
5742
5743*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5744current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5745around in a buffer.
5746
5747Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5748
5749*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5750uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5751be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5752established system of notation similar to Chess.
5753
5754*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5755documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5756guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5757
5758*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5759available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5760system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5761simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5762functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5763the like.
5764
5765*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5766identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5767
5768*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5769within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5770used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5771the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5772
5773*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5774
5775 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5776 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5777 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5778 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5779 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5780 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5781 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5782 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5783 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5784 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5785 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5786
5787 Platform-specific modes:
5788
5789 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5790 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5791 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5792 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5793 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5794 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5795 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5796 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5797 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
0cb146bf 5798
3787e12e
GM
5799* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5800
5801** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5802use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5803That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5804Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5805
5806Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5807you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5808consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5809
5810** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5811and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5812specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5813searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5814
5815** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5816multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5817character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5818environment.
5819
5820** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5821take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5822string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5823current input method for reading this one event.
5824
5825** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5826now control whether to output certain characters as
5827backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5828non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5829characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5830in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
0cb146bf 5831
3787e12e
GM
5832* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5833
5834** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5835of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5836
5837** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5838in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5839always increases point by 1.
5840
5841The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5842considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5843
5844See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5845
5846** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5847Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5848default value changed. For example,
5849
5850 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5851 :type 'integer
5852 :group 'foo
5853 :version "20.3")
5854
5855 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5856 :version "20.3")
5857
5858If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5859default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5860is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5861`:version' in the top level group.
5862
5863This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5864
5865** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5866starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5867
5868However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5869symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5870support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5871to themselves.
5872
5873If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5874this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5875values whatever.
5876
5877** There is a new debugger command, R.
5878It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5879in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5880
5881** Frame-local variables.
5882
5883You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5884the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5885local bindings for that variable.
5886
5887These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5888frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5889modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5890parameter name.
5891
5892Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5893Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5894active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5895that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5896
5897It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5898clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5899very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5900through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5901
5902** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5903"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5904evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5905makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5906See the documentation in sregex.el.
5907
5908** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5909is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5910parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5911The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5912
5913** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5914If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5915
5916** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5917known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5918define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5919
5920** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5921when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5922it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5923history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5924
5925The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5926return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5927empty input.
5928
5929** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5930for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5931`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5932Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5933`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5934
5935** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5936echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5937a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5938default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5939
5940** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5941specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5942function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5943place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5944non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5945
5946** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5947If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5948up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5949end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5950
5951** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5952which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5953If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5954
5955** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5956holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5957was directed to display this buffer.
5958
5959** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5960with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5961describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5962other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5963set-window-configuration.
5964
5965** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5966window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5967positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5968windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5969
5970** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5971override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5972look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5973
5974If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5975non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5976map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5977
5978minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5979and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5980
5981** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5982except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5983
5984** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5985USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5986floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5987
5988** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5989to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5990in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5991it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5992
5993** Menu changes
5994
5995*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5996keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5997better supported.
5998
5999The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6000a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6001you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6002can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6003then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6004
6005*** A new format for menu items is supported.
6006
6007In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6008 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6009defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6010starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6011
6012The format is:
6013 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6014 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6015where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6016string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6017The supported properties include
6018
6019:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6020 item is enabled.
6021:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6022 item should appear in the menu.
6023:filter FILTER-FN
6024 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6025 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6026 It should return a binding to use instead.
6027:keys DESCRIPTION
6028 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
6029 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
6030 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6031:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6032 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6033 keyboard binding.
6034:key-sequence nil
6035 This means that the command normally has no
6036 keyboard equivalent.
6037:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6038:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6039 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6040 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6041 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6042
6043Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6044Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6045
6046(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6047
6048** New event types
6049
6050*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6051mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6052corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6053which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6054
6055 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6056
6057where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6058same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6059indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6060negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6061the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6062forward, away from the user.
6063
6064As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6065
6066*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6067files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6068and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6069filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6070loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6071
6072 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6073
6074where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6075same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6076that were dragged and dropped.
6077
6078As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6079
6080** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6081
6082*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6083any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6084to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6085
6086*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6087can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6088that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6089
6090*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6091in Emacs 19 and before.
6092
6093The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6094The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6095
6096*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6097buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6098unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6099representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6100
6101This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6102as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6103viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6104one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6105will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6106
6107This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6108representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6109(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6110consistent with the new representation.
6111
6112*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6113representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6114about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6115however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6116
6117The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6118nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6119using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6120
6121*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6122representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6123representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6124
6125The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6126loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6127is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6128
6129*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6130which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6131
6132*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6133which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6134
6135*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6136portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6137so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6138You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6139
6140*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6141it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6142
6143*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6144convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6145buffer or string being searched.
6146
6147One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6148[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6149searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6150searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6151obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6152you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6153expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6154
6155*** Structure of coding system changed.
6156
6157All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6158by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6159which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6160as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6161vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6162your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6163define-coding-system-alias.
6164
6165The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6166the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6167access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6168pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6169character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6170safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6171'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6172`iso-8859-1'.
6173
6174Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6175The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6176coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6177(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6178
6179Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6180also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6181are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6182the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6183
6184*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6185proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6186This function requires a user interaction.
6187
6188*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6189find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6190select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6191systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6192a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6193select-safe-coding-system.
6194
6195*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6196decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6197last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6198was done.
6199
6200*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6201used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6202coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6203
6204*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6205return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6206characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6207`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6208
6209*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6210coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6211coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6212converted.
6213
6214*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6215coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6216
6217*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6218character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6219character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6220each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6221either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6222range of characters.
6223
6224*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6225Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6226
6227*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6228in the current buffer at position POS.
6229
6230*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6231input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6232function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6233character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6234event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6235binding input-method-function to nil.
6236
6237The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6238method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6239input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6240the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6241not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6242
6243The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6244subsequent events of a key sequence.
6245
6246*** You can customize any language environment by using
6247set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6248
6249The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6250customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6251instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6252environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6253exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
0cb146bf 6254
3787e12e
GM
6255* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6256
6257** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6258options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6259at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6260tree structure.
6261
6262M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6263user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6264
6265With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6266session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6267in your .emacs file.)
6268
6269** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6270You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6271
6272** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6273This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6274
6275** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6276immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6277kills the region.
6278
6279The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6280delete the character before point, as usual.
6281
6282** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6283on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6284by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6285
6286** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6287insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6288the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6289onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6290history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6291past.)
6292
6293** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6294This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6295in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6296TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6297makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6298
6299As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6300and is an alias for it.
6301
6302If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6303use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6304
6305** Scrolling changes
6306
6307*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6308position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6309
6310In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6311on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6312where it started.
6313
6314*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6315move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6316screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6317does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6318
6319*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6320top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6321comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6322recenters the window.
6323
6324** International character set support (MULE)
6325
6326Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6327including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6328Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6329Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6330features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6331MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6332
6333Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6334coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6335character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6336variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6337into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6338
6339Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6340generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6341supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6342language, to make it possible to type them.
6343
6344The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6345character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6346
6347The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6348to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6349
6350You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6351
6352 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6353
6354Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6355characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6356argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6357already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6358characters for their work until they want to change.
6359
6360*** Input methods
6361
6362An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6363specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6364has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6365the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6366support several input methods.
6367
6368The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6369another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6370work.
6371
6372A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6373characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6374composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6375consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6376sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6377letter.
6378
6379The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6380by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6381First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6382marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6383mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6384
6385None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6386they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6387phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6388converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6389
6390Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6391word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6392typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6393the first guess is wrong.
6394
6395*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6396turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6397
6398If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6399byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6400they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6401the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6402
6403However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6404use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6405includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6406translate automatically to and from either one.
6407
6408*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6409
6410Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6411file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6412sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6413what you want.
6414
6415If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6416example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6417system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6418multibyte characters in that buffer.
6419
6420If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6421character conversion as well.
6422
6423*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6424
6425A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6426Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6427requires using many fonts.
6428
6429Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6430collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6431
6432A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6433the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6434have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6435you would use a font.
6436
6437If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6438specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6439display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6440
6441The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6442(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6443characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6444or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6445and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6446
6447*** Defining fontsets.
6448
6449Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6450chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6451with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6452
6453Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6454of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6455`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6456standard fontset are created automatically.
6457
6458If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6459argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6460FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6461with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6462name is `fontset-startup'.
6463
6464Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6465The resource value should have this form:
6466 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6467FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6468 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6469 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6470 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6471The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6472of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6473CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6474FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6475
6476Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6477last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6478You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6479
6480For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6481font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6482following resource,
6483 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6484the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6485 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6486Here is the substitution rule:
6487 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6488 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6489 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6490 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6491 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6492
6493The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6494fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6495that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6496
6497With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6498like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6499name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6500fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6501fontsets.
6502
6503*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6504defaults for a particular choice of language.
6505
6506Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6507method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6508visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6509already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6510language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6511system for new files that you create.
6512
6513It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6514set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6515whole Emacs session.
6516
6517For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6518chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6519with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6520
6521*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6522specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6523specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6524the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6525coding systems that Emacs supports.
6526
6527*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6528lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6529This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6530After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6531is used for *the immediately following command*.
6532
6533So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6534write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6535
6536If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6537then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6538
6539For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6540visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6541
6542*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6543construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6544to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6545specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6546of the file.
6547
6548*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6549the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6550code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6551translated into that character code.
6552
6553This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6554various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6555
6556By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6557
6558*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6559the coding system for keyboard input.
6560
6561Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6562with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6563some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6564
6565By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6566
6567Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6568input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6569translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6570to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6571designed to work with terminals.
6572
6573*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6574specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6575This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6576has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6577translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6578in the corresponding buffer.
6579
6580By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6581
6582*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6583to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6584It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6585
6586*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6587an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6588command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6589want to use.
6590
6591C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6592method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6593
6594*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6595layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6596remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6597which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6598
6599*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6600the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6601related information.
6602
6603*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6604HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6605scripts.
6606
6607*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6608information about the support for a particular language.
6609You specify the language as an argument.
6610
6611*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6612the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6613first dash.
6614
6615A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6616(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6617whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
66181 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6619
6620 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6621 B big5 (Chinese)
6622 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6623 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6624 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6625 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6626 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6627 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6628 K euc-korea (Korean)
6629 R koi8 (Russian)
6630 Q tibetan
6631 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6632 T lao
6633 T tis620 (Thai)
6634 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6635 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6636 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6637 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6638 z hz (Chinese)
6639
6640When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6641two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6642coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6643keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6644
6645*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6646conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6647
6648When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6649into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6650rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6651Rmail files themselves.
6652
6653*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6654conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6655
6656Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6657for sending mail:
6658
6659- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6660- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6661- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6662 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6663- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6664
6665*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6666to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6667Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6668translations.
6669
6670** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6671of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6672insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6673without any conversion.
6674
6675** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6676You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6677RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6678any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6679
6680** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6681functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6682
6683Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6684Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6685
6686Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6687mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6688
6689** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6690complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6691in the buffer before point.
6692
6693With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6694symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6695you are using.
6696
6697With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6698just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6699
6700** File locking works with NFS now.
6701
6702The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6703in the same directory as FILENAME.
6704
6705This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6706works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6707can become a bottleneck.
6708
6709The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6710does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6711create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6712file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6713rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6714so useful that the change is worth while.
6715
6716When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6717are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6718collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6719tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6720
6721** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6722it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6723show-paren-mode.
6724
6725** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6726selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6727delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6728
6729** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6730within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6731complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6732
6733** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6734it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6735set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6736
6737** Changes in View mode.
6738
6739*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6740Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6741
6742*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6743view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6744
6745*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6746previous state.
6747
6748*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6749scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6750
6751*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6752non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6753not just the selected window.
6754
6755*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6756read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6757turns View mode on or off.
6758
6759*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6760how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6761delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6762
6763** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6764now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6765
6766** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6767has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6768presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6769which version to compare with.
6770
6771** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6772blocks if a match is inside the block.
6773
6774The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6775is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6776isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6777shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6778
6779By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6780of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6781blocks, all of them or none.
6782
6783** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6784current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6785confirmation first.
6786
6787** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6788now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6789However, the mode will not be changed if
6790(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6791(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6792 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6793(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6794
6795This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6796
6797However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6798these commands do not change the major mode.
6799
6800** M-x occur changes.
6801
6802*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6803it performs a case-sensitive search.
6804
6805*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6806if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6807using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6808
6809** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6810in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6811window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6812that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6813buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6814
6815** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6816after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6817appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6818come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6819
6820** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6821selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6822buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6823
6824** Outline mode changes.
6825
6826*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6827
6828*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6829
6830** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6831you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6832Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6833was already active.
6834
6835The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6836unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6837get confused by it.
6838
6839If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6840set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6841
6842** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6843
6844*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6845conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6846character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6847including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6848
6849The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6850mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6851copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6852
6853*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6854are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6855values.
6856
6857`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6858case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6859`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6860case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6861
6862** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6863certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6864can be. The default value is 30.
6865
6866** Changes in Mail mode.
6867
6868*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6869Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6870composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6871`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6872`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6873behavior.
6874
6875C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6876compose-mail-other-frame.
6877
6878*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6879the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6880replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6881buffer that shows the original message.
6882
6883*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6884with separator lines around the contents.
6885
6886*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6887in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6888definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6889need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6890
6891*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6892
6893**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6894for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6895controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6896Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6897
6898**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6899to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6900/etc/passwd.
6901
6902**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6903to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6904/etc/passwd.
6905
6906** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6907special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6908directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6909reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6910
6911Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6912when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6913be taken to be magic.
6914
6915** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6916files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6917available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6918
6919M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6920(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6921
6922** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6923suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6924
6925In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6926
6927new key dired.el binding old key
6928------- ---------------- -------
6929 * c dired-change-marks c
6930 * m dired-mark m
6931 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6932 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6933 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6934 * u dired-unmark u
6935 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6936 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6937 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6938 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6939 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6940 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6941
6942** Rmail changes.
6943
6944*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6945saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6946chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6947each time you run it.
6948
6949*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6950whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6951
6952*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6953messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6954means to move in the opposite direction.
6955
6956*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6957you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6958
6959*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6960just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6961It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6962can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6963for output.
6964
6965** Gnus changes.
6966
6967*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6968
6969*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6970Gnus.
6971
6972*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6973`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6974
6975*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6976article mode line.
6977
6978*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6979
6980*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6981
6982(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6983
6984*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6985are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6986`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6987
6988*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6989
6990*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6991
6992*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6993See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6994
6995*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6996Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6997used to pick articles.
6998
6999*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7000another have been added.
7001
7002 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7003
7004*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7005generating lines in buffers.
7006
7007*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7008`M-C-_'.
7009
7010*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7011
7012*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7013
7014 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7015
7016*** Scores can be decayed.
7017
7018 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7019
7020*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7021Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7022
7023*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7024the native server.
7025
7026 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7027
7028*** A new command for reading collections of documents
7029(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
7030
7031*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7032
7033*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7034even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7035
7036*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7037(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7038
7039 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7040 a group.
7041
7042*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7043sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7044
7045 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7046
7047*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7048
7049 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7050
7051*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7052
7053 Use the `Y c' command.
7054
7055*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7056
7057*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7058
7059 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7060
7061*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7062from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7063
7064 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7065
7066*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7067
7068*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7069the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7070
7071 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7072
7073Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7074and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7075from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7076hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7077this issue.)
7078
7079Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7080automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7081particular news group. This can be done by:
7082
7083 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7084
7085Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7086of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7087"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7088system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7089for reading and posting).
7090
7091CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7092 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7093Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7094newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7095there.
7096
7097Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7098default. Here are some of these default settings:
7099
7100 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7101 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7102 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7103 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7104 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7105
7106When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7107the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7108
7109** CC mode changes.
7110
7111*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7112code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7113values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7114this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7115Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7116loaded.
7117
7118If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7119Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7120style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7121share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7122c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7123must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7124
7125*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7126of the current buffer.
7127
7128*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7129it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7130of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7131
7132*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7133style that the Python developers like.
7134
7135*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7136This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7137just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7138
7139** VC Changes [new]
7140
7141** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
7142name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7143directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7144
7145This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7146master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7147developers.
7148
7149You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7150RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7151
7152*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7153other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7154writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7155calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7156
7157*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7158version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7159
7160** Calendar changes.
7161
7162A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
7163of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
7164for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
7165
7166** ps-print changes
7167
7168There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
7169
7170*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
7171
7172The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
7173formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
7174`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
7175`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
7176It defaults to `letter'.
7177If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
7178
7179The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
7180of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
7181non-nil means "landscape" mode.
7182
7183The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
7184It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
7185It defaults to 1.
7186
7187*** Horizontal layout
7188
7189The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
7190`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7191All are measured in points.
7192
7193*** Vertical layout
7194
7195The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7196`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7197All are measured in points.
7198
7199*** Headers
7200
7201If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7202`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7203margin above the text.
7204
7205If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7206framing box is printed around the header.
7207
7208The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7209`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7210
7211The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7212`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7213`ps-header-font-size'.
7214
7215*** Font managing
7216
7217The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7218used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7219`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7220elements to this alist.
7221
7222The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7223for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7224
7225** hideshow changes.
7226
7227*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7228C++, ; for lisp).
7229
7230*** Support for java-mode added.
7231
7232*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7233in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7234
7235*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7236the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7237way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7238
7239*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7240robust and a lot faster.
7241
7242*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7243
7244*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7245to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7246documentation for more details.
7247
7248** Changes in Enriched mode.
7249
7250*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7251filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7252of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7253use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7254the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7255
7256*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7257distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7258as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7259as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7260
7261** Font Lock mode
7262
7263*** Custom support
7264
7265The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7266font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7267faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7268group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7269your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7270consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7271
7272You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7273
7274*** Maximum decoration
7275
7276Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7277default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7278of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7279supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7280to get the old behavior.
7281
7282*** New support
7283
7284Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7285
7286Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7287support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7288
7289*** Configurable support
7290
7291Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7292additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7293c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7294java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7295list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7296of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7297convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7298
7299Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7300way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7301it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7302
7303*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7304
7305You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7306highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7307for any mode.
7308
7309For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7310
7311 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7312
7313in your ~/.emacs.
7314
7315*** New faces
7316
7317Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7318font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7319distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7320to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7321
7322*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7323
7324The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7325cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7326same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7327
7328*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7329
7330The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7331according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7332the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7333non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7334refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7335the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7336Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7337
7338This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7339For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7340this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7341refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7342containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7343the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7344
7345As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7346
7347Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7348Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7349Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7350new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7351
7352If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7353settings.
7354
7355** Ada mode changes.
7356
7357*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7358If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7359procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7360you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7361stubs.
7362
7363*** There are two new commands:
7364 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7365 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7366
7367The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7368`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7369`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7370
7371*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7372is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7373Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7374
7375*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7376formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7377places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7378space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7379
7380** Scheme mode changes.
7381
7382*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7383mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7384for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7385with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7386have any effect.
7387
7388If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7389still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7390scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7391variables as buffer-local variables.
7392
7393*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7394Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7395
7396** Changes to the emacsclient program
7397
7398*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7399USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7400associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7401can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7402
7403*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7404it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7405buffer in Emacs.
7406
7407*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7408use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7409ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7410option takes precedence.
7411
7412** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7413constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7414(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7415
7416** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7417which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7418the current defun.
7419
7420** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7421following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7422
7423** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7424and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7425necessary).
7426
7427** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7428if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7429these register values no longer become completely useless.
7430If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7431asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7432it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7433
7434** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7435example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7436be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7437you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7438
7439You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7440variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7441file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7442revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7443only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7444
7445** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7446since it applies only to the current frame.
7447
7448** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7449file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7450and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7451
7452This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7453multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7454variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7455tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7456instead of just the file you are editing.
7457
7458** RefTeX mode
7459
7460RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7461and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7462different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7463multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7464turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7465
7466C-c ( reftex-label
7467 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7468 knows which kind of label is needed.
7469
7470C-c ) reftex-reference
7471 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7472 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7473
7474C-c [ reftex-citation
7475 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7476 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7477
7478C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7479 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7480
7481C-c = reftex-toc
7482 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7483 can quickly jump to every section.
7484
7485Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7486commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7487Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7488reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7489C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7490
7491** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7492
7493*** Info documentation is now available.
7494
7495*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7496both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7497
7498*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7499bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7500
7501*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7502(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7503
7504*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7505entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7506appropriate functions.
7507
7508*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7509entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7510
7511*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7512been cleaned.
7513
7514*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7515bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7516
7517*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7518shall be delimited.
7519
7520*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7521bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7522bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7523
7524*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7525field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7526prefixed with `ALT'.
7527
7528*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7529bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7530formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7531documentation).
7532
7533*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7534documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7535for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7536
7537*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7538comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7539
7540*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7541alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7542signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7543
7544*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7545
7546*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7547
7548*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7549from alien sources.
7550
7551*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7552to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7553crossref entries.
7554
7555*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7556region.
7557
7558*** Added support for imenu.
7559
7560*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7561of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7562`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7563`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7564
7565*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7566from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7567
7568** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7569
7570** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7571
7572** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7573functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7574Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7575as an argument.
7576
7577When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7578and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7579
7580** browse-url changes
7581
7582*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7583Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7584(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7585non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7586customization variables.
7587
7588*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7589
7590*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7591lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7592(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7593
7594** Changes in Ediff
7595
7596*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7597pops up the Info file for this command.
7598
7599*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7600the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7601merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7602directories).
7603
7604*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7605and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7606files in the same directory.
7607
7608*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7609The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7610related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7611
7612** Changes in Viper
7613
7614*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7615*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7616 instead of vip-.
7617*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7618*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7619Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7620*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7621*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7622*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7623color when Viper is in insert state.
7624*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7625Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7626viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7627
7628** Etags changes.
7629
7630*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7631default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7632Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7633variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7634not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7635
7636*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7637
7638*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7639constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7640
7641*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7642recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7643In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7644
7645*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7646C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7647recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7648methods and protocols.
7649
7650*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7651.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7652column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7653paragraph name.
7654
7655*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7656an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7657at least M times and as many as N times.
7658
7659** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7660in files has changed slightly.
7661
7662With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7663time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7664This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7665with old time-stamp-format values.
7666
7667In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7668(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7669This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7670reasons.
7671
7672In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7673natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7674fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7675(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7676time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7677specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7678
7679Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7680case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7681truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7682
7683The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7684being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7685future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7686recommended now will continue to work then.
7687
7688See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7689details.
7690
7691** There are some additional major modes:
7692
7693dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7694m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7695meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7696
7697** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7698copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7699into Emacs.
7700
7701** New Lisp packages include:
7702
7703*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7704
7705*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7706be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7707
7708*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7709
7710*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7711in shell buffers.
7712
7713*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7714See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7715and `elint-defun'.
7716
7717*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7718meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7719ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7720strings or comments.
7721
7722These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7723abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7724you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7725insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7726at these points.
7727
7728*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7729can visit them by short forms of their names.
7730
7731*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7732Emacs Lisp function at point.
7733
7734*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7735
7736*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7737switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7738
7739*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7740
7741*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7742
7743*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7744
7745*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7746from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7747
7748*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7749You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7750inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7751original place after inserting the copy.
7752
7753*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7754on the buffer.
7755
7756You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7757velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7758(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7759
7760Enable mouse-drag with:
7761 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7762-or-
7763 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7764
7765*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7766mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7767
7768*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7769It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7770
7771*** ogonek
7772
7773The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7774Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7775platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7776TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7777ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7778prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7779instance) and vice versa.
7780
7781To use this package load it using
7782 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7783Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7784 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7785 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7786The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7787ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7788
7789*** Interface to ph.
7790
7791Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7792
7793The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7794services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7795these servers.
7796
7797*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7798
7799*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7800You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7801while the real cursor does not move.
7802
7803*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7804for visiting your favorite web sites.
7805
7806*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7807so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7808
7809** movemail change
7810
7811Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7812mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7813supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7814user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7815
7816This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
0cb146bf 7817
3787e12e
GM
7818* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7819
7820** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7821
7822Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7823end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7824Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7825file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7826file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7827
7828To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7829C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7830coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7831specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7832LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7833save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
0cb146bf 7834
3787e12e
GM
7835* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7836
7837** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7838Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7839vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7840Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7841
7842** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7843to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7844
7845In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7846don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7847"win".
7848
7849** Basic Lisp changes
7850
7851*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7852evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7853
7854*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7855be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7856or by the user.
7857
7858The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7859
7860*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7861
7862(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7863(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7864
7865*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7866usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7867its argument.
7868
7869*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7870
7871*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7872
7873*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7874
7875*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7876error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7877include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7878`format' function.
7879
7880*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7881or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7882whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7883
7884*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7885either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7886adding one of these suffixes.
7887
7888*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7889which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7890If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7891
7892We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7893because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7894
7895*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7896
7897*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7898You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7899
7900*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7901conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7902
7903 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7904
7905BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7906BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7907
7908*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7909choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7910restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7911works using `save-current-buffer'.
7912
7913*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7914write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7915of the last form.
7916
7917*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7918which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7919last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7920as the last form.
7921
7922*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7923characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7924matches.
7925
7926For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7927
7928*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7929with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7930Then it returns that string.
7931
7932For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7933
7934(with-output-to-string
7935 (princ "The buffer is ")
7936 (princ (buffer-name)))
7937
7938returns "The buffer is foo".
7939
7940** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7941is non-nil.
7942
7943These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7944buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7945characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7946
7947*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7948a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7949
7950Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7951character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7952Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7953position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7954characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7955 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7956
7957ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7958Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7959non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7960characters".
7961
7962The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7963through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7964"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7965range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7966leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7967
7968*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7969(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7970multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7971character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7972
7973This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7974always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7975
7976However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7977
7978*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7979because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7980have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7981the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7982guaranteed.
7983
7984*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7985between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7986character).
7987
7988When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7989
7990 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7991 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7992 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7993 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7994 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7995
7996*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7997
7998*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7999`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8000more than the number of characters.
8001
8002You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8003it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8004\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8005is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8006follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8007newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8008
8009*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8010and returns a string containing those characters.
8011
8012*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8013(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8014counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8015character, sref signals an error.
8016
8017*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8018in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8019string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8020
8021*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8022in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8023region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8024
8025*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8026the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8027to a vector of the characters in it.
8028
8029*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8030of a string. You call it as follows:
8031
8032 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8033
8034This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8035STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8036This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8037Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8038it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8039
8040*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8041if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8042
8043*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8044if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8045
8046*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8047to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8048not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8049which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8050
8051(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8052
8053This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8054
8055The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8056If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8057are not included in the resulting value.
8058
8059The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8060at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8061WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8062is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8063
8064If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8065place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8066character extends across that column), then the padding character
8067PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8068string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8069column START-COLUMN.
8070
8071*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8072the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8073necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8074difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8075changed text, before the change.
8076
8077*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8078sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8079one character set for each script, not for each language.
8080
8081**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8082
8083**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8084
8085**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8086set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8087
8088**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8089name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8090which identify the character within that character set.
8091
8092**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8093byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8094opposite of split-char.
8095
8096**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8097of all the characters between BEG and END.
8098
8099**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8100of all the characters in a string.
8101
8102*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8103and specifying coding systems.
8104
8105**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8106system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8107of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8108(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8109and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8110as what to do about code conversion.)
8111
8112**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8113name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8114
8115**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8116for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8117except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8118
8119Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8120which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8121to match against a file name.
8122
8123VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8124a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8125decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8126to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8127systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8128specifies the coding system for encoding.
8129
8130If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8131or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8132
8133**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8134the coding system to use for network sockets.
8135
8136Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8137which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8138either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8139service names.
8140
8141VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8142a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8143decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8144to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8145systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8146specifies the coding system for encoding.
8147
8148If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8149or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8150
8151**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8152for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8153except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8154start the subprocess.
8155
8156**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8157systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8158when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8159(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8160to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8161
8162**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8163coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8164subprocess.
8165
8166It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8167but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8168start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8169connection permanently or until overridden.
8170
8171The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8172file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8173network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8174coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8175It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8176system for one operation at a time.
8177
8178**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8179files, subprocesses or network connections.
8180
8181**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8182coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8183The value is a cons cell,
8184 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8185where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8186the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8187input to the subprocess.
8188
8189**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8190change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8191
8192** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8193customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8194you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8195
8196You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8197variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8198information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8199legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8200customization.
8201
8202Thus, instead of writing
8203
8204 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8205 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8206
8207you would now write this:
8208
8209 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8210 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8211 :type 'boolean
8212 :group foo)
8213
8214The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8215two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8216describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8217for a description of them.
8218
8219The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8220should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8221
8222 (defgroup ispell nil
8223 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8224 :group 'processes)
8225
8226The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8227group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8228but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8229to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8230second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8231
8232Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8233package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8234have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8235package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8236first-level subgroups.
8237
8238** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8239
8240This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8241separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8242
8243** easy-mmode
8244
8245The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8246developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8247only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8248predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8249`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8250`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8251
8252** Text property changes
8253
8254*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8255text property.
8256
8257*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8258previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8259place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8260functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8261starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8262
8263If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8264LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8265of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8266position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8267
8268*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8269value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8270is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8271
8272** Changes in invisibility features
8273
8274*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8275hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8276is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8277should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8278would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8279make the overlay visible.
8280
8281During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8282invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8283needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8284which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8285the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8286t when it should hide it.
8287
8288*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8289
8290Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8291invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8292and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8293Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8294manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8295Here is an example of how to do this:
8296
8297 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8298 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8299 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8300 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8301
8302 ...
8303 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8304
8305 ...
8306 ;; When done with the overlays:
8307 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8308 ;; Or respectively:
8309 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8310
8311** Changes in syntax parsing.
8312
8313*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8314`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8315obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8316`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8317
8318If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8319is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8320used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8321
8322When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8323character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8324
8325 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8326 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8327
8328 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8329 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8330 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8331
8332 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8333 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8334 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8335 determine the syntax type of the character.
8336
8337 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8338 of the current buffer.
8339
8340*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8341value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8342for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8343
8344*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8345and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8346only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8347character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8348another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8349
8350These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8351text property.
8352
8353*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8354arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8355of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8356
8357*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8358(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8359element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8360nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8361string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8362
8363*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8364syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8365`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8366
8367** Changes in face features
8368
8369*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8370if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8371
8372*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8373of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8374
8375*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8376set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8377
8378*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8379set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8380
8381*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8382by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8383and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8384the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8385overlay property).
8386
8387This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8388arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8389
8390** Changes in file-handling functions
8391
8392*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8393directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8394they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8395is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8396
8397This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8398begins with ~.
8399
8400*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8401it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8402
8403*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8404the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8405
8406*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8407as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8408
8409*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8410character code conversion as well as other things.
8411
8412Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8413(formerly it did not).
8414
8415*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8416environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8417
8418*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8419instead of constant strings.
8420
8421*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8422to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8423any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8424
8425substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8426in the same way as before.
8427
8428*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8429The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8430which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8431
8432*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8433error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8434else, and returns nil.
8435
8436*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8437directory cannot be listed.
8438
8439** Changes in minibuffer input
8440
8441*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8442read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8443additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8444argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8445ways:
8446
8447 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8448 It is available through the history command M-n.
8449
8450*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8451read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8452argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8453minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8454enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8455
8456In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8457argument in this way.
8458
8459*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8460from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8461minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8462
8463** Echo area features
8464
8465*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8466echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8467minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8468after the echo area is cleared.
8469
8470*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8471in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8472
8473** Keyboard input features
8474
8475*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8476set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8477
8478*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8479received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8480by keyboard macros.
8481
8482** Frame-related changes
8483
8484*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8485creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8486hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8487
8488*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8489the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8490has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8491
8492*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8493selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8494value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8495in the selected frame.
8496
8497*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8498is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8499which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8500
8501** X Windows features
8502
8503*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8504x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8505x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8506
8507*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8508The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8509
8510*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8511MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8512A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8513
8514If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8515it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8516
8517** Subprocess features
8518
8519*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8520functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8521automatically.
8522
8523*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8524and returns the output from the command as a string.
8525
8526*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8527and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8528
8529** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8530does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8531
8532** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8533at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8534goes after the other menu items.
8535
8536** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8537of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8538around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8539are in use.
8540
8541The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8542series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8543
8544Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8545after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8546form.
8547
8548** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8549is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8550but its hook is still run.
8551
8552** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8553for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8554
8555If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8556regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8557useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8558
8559This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8560are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8561filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8562warned.
8563
8564** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8565way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8566
8567** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8568integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8569functions like display-time.
8570
8571** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8572name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8573
8574** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8575can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8576is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8577
8578** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8579if there is an error in compilation.
8580
8581** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8582switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8583argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8584they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8585
8586** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8587Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8588the *scratch* buffer.
8589
8590** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8591The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8592where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8593e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8594
8595** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8596and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8597It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8598
8599** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8600using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8601variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8602and compose-mail-other-frame.
8603
8604** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8605can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8606full name of the specified user will be returned.
8607
8608** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8609of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8610where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8611in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8612option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8613files at all.
8614
8615** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8616and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8617width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8618the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8619
8620For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8621minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8622with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8623is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8624
8625** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8626
8627** imenu.el changes.
8628
8629You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8630item from menu created by imenu.
8631
8632An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8633#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8634select one of those items.
0cb146bf 8635
3787e12e 8636* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
0cb146bf 8637
3787e12e
GM
8638* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8639
8640** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8641mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8642
8643** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8644use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8645Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
0cb146bf 8646
3787e12e
GM
8647* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8648
8649** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8650To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8651
8652** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8653conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8654matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8655expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8656word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8657all caps.
8658
8659** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8660at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8661
8662When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8663does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8664as in previous Emacs versions.
8665
8666** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8667non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8668time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8669frames.
8670
8671** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8672if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8673This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8674Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8675accident.
8676
8677** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8678keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8679It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8680line and then executing the macro.
8681
8682This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8683
8684** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8685(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8686characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8687characters.
8688
8689** Font Lock mode
8690
8691*** Font Lock support modes
8692
8693Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8694below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8695hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8696to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8697Font Lock mode is enabled.
8698
8699For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8700
8701 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8702
8703in your ~/.emacs.
8704
8705*** lazy-lock
8706
8707The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8708only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8709becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8710Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8711occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8712buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8713Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8714
8715To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8716
8717 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8718
8719To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8720
8721** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8722
8723*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8724paren and key.
8725
8726*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8727supported.
8728
8729** Gnus changes.
8730
8731Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8732commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8733significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8734previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8735
8736Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8737between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8738
8739*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8740variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8741obsolete.
8742
8743*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8744missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8745
8746 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8747
8748*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8749
8750 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8751
8752*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8753referred.
8754
8755*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8756
8757 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8758
8759*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8760
8761 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8762
8763*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8764buffers.
8765
8766 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8767
8768*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8769
8770 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8771
8772*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8773
8774 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8775
8776*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8777
8778 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8779
8780*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8781is possible.
8782
8783 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8784
8785*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8786groups of groups.
8787
8788*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8789
8790*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8791batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8792
8793*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8794
8795*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8796
8797*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8798
8799 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8800
8801*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8802expiration times.
8803
8804*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8805
8806*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8807process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8808
8809*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8810articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8811bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8812
8813*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8814articles with the `*' command.
8815
8816*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8817
8818*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8819
8820 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8821
8822*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8823
8824*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8825`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8826
8827*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8828buffer.
8829
8830*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8831
8832*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8833
8834*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8835
8836 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8837
8838*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8839
8840 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8841
8842*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8843
8844*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8845
8846*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8847
8848 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8849 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8850
8851*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8852refetching.
8853
8854 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8855
8856*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8857buffer to allow easier treatment.
8858
8859*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8860
8861*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8862
8863 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8864
8865*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8866articles.
8867
8868 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8869
8870*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8871
8872*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8873cited text to hide is now customizable.
8874
8875 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8876
8877*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8878
8879 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8880
8881*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8882
8883*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8884
8885The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8886in greater detail.
0cb146bf 8887
3787e12e
GM
8888* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8889
8890** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8891second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8892asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8893exists.
8894
8895** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8896as well as lists.
8897
8898** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8899of a given keymap.
8900
8901** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8902given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8903keymap or nil.
8904
8905** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8906an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8907name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8908menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8909equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8910alias.
0cb146bf 8911
3787e12e
GM
8912* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8913
8914** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8915
8916Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8917This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8918was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8919far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8920pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8921
8922For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8923you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8924`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8925
8926** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8927
8928The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8929do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8930It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8931much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8932chapter of the manual for details.
8933
8934However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8935customization variables take effect.
8936
8937** Marking with the mouse.
8938
8939When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8940highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8941using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8942
8943** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8944
8945*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8946
8947*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8948to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8949
8950*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8951in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8952you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8953application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8954applications, these problems are significant.
8955
8956If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8957likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8958However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8959will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8960other DOS application as a subprocess.
8961
8962Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8963You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8964
8965If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8966subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8967have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8968Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8969separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8970Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8971
8972** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8973
8974This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8975which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8976minibuffer contains.
8977
8978** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8979
8980The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8981It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8982It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8983affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8984
8985The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8986it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8987and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8988when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8989
8990** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8991enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8992
8993** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8994F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8995Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8996
8997If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8998menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8999something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
9000the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
9001
9002 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
9003
9004** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
9005to replace the characters it "deletes".
9006
9007** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
9008
9009** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
9010a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
9011select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
9012It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
9013immediately after the selected one.
9014
9015This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
9016made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
9017
9018** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
9019
9020Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
9021directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
9022If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
9023Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
9024recover-session.
9025
9026You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
9027auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
9028will not work.
9029
9030Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
9031normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
9032this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
9033bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
9034now that the bug is fixed.
9035
9036** Changes to Version Control (VC)
9037
9038There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
9039when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
9040Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
9041which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
9042
9043If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
9044telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
9045VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
9046the link is visited and a warning displayed.
9047
9048** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
9049Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
9050is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
9051
9052There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
9053Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
9054enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
9055The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
9056remain normal.
9057
9058** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
9059header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
9060
9061Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
9062known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
9063offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
9064Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
9065
9066Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
9067of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
9068a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
9069name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
9070documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
9071`mail-directory-stream'.)
9072
9073** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
9074skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
9075characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
9076with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
9077
9078Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
9079- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
9080wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
9081
9082The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
9083less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
9084headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
9085Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
9086Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
9087fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
9088to a limitation in font-lock).
9089
9090External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
9091
9092** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
9093buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
9094buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
9095this example:
9096
9097 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
9098 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
9099
9100** Changes in BibTeX mode.
9101
9102*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
9103
9104*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
9105
9106*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
9107
9108*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
9109entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
9110will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
9111isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
9112(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
9113The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
9114
9115*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
9116does the same job.
9117
9118*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
9119"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
9120
9121*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
9122text.
9123
9124** Font Lock mode
9125
9126*** Global Font Lock mode
9127
9128Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
9129new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
9130font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
9131turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
9132on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
9133
9134For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
9135
9136 (global-font-lock-mode t)
9137
9138in your ~/.emacs.
9139
9140*** Local Refontification
9141
9142In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
9143However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
9144those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
9145command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
9146
9147In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
9148(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
9149current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
9150above and below point.
9151
9152With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
9153
9154** Follow mode
9155
9156Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
9157buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
9158side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
9159they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
9160split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
9161follow-mode.
9162
9163M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
9164
9165To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
9166command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
9167
9168** hide-show changes.
9169
9170The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
9171to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
9172normal hooks.
9173
9174** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
9175The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
9176
9177** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
9178recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
9179those that begin a function, record, or macro.
9180
9181** MSDOS Changes
9182
9183*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
9184Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
9185
9186*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
9187and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
9188
9189*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
9190
9191*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9192pressing both mouse buttons.
9193
9194*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9195restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9196are:
9197
9198**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9199now works.
9200
9201**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9202
9203**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9204implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9205
9206**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9207
9208**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9209
9210**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9211
9212**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9213
9214**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
0cb146bf 9215
3787e12e
GM
9216* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9217
9218** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9219tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9220remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9221this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9222behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9223
9224** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9225
9226The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9227not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9228need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9229be different.
9230
9231It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9232than `system-type'.
9233
9234See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9235
9236** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9237now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9238
9239** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9240that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9241
9242** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9243no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9244reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9245
9246The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9247to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9248like this:
9249
9250 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9251
9252SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9253It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9254becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9255
9256REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9257seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9258means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9259
9260*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9261up if too much time passes.
9262
9263 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9264
9265This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9266If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9267of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9268form in BODY.
9269
9270*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9271a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9272call looks like this:
9273
9274 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9275
9276SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9277runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9278timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9279ARGS.
9280
9281Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9282command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9283command.
9284
9285REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9286time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9287does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9288each time Emacs becomes idle.
9289
9290If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9291idle for SECS seconds.
9292
9293*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9294all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9295programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9296instead.
9297
9298*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9299there is no answer within a certain time.
9300
9301 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9302
9303asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9304within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9305Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9306
9307** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9308arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9309meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9310arguments in between are ignored.
9311
9312This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9313the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9314
9315** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9316/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9317/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9318site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9319version.
9320
9321It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9322version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9323for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9324has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9325and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9326problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9327
9328** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9329.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9330systems with limited file name syntax.
9331
9332Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9333convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9334for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9335completions.el:
9336
9337(defvar save-completions-file-name
9338 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9339 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9340
9341This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9342depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9343convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9344Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9345MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9346
9347** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9348rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9349minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9350
9351** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9352marker from its buffer position.
9353
9354** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9355Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9356The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9357
9358** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9359that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9360condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9361of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9362matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9363regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9364
9365This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9366errors that happen often during editing.
9367
9368** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9369into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9370puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9371
9372** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9373now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9374
9375** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9376a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9377name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9378to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9379and not get-buffer-window.
9380
9381** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9382calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9383being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9384
9385If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9386buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9387property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9388non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9389are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9390property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9391over and over for the same text.
9392
9393** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9394
9395*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9396in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9397
9398;; @(#) HEADER: text
9399;; $HEADER: text $
9400
9401in addition to the normal
9402
9403;; HEADER: text
9404
9405*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9406checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9407lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9408
9409
0cb146bf 9410
3787e12e 9411* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9412
9413----------------------------------------------------------------------
9414Copyright information:
9415
75d80cc6 9416Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9417
9418 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9419 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9420 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9421 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9422
9423 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9424 of this document, or of portions of it,
9425 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9426 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
0cb146bf 9427
a933dad1
DL
9428Local variables:
9429mode: outline
9430paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9431end: